Nokia Solutions and Networks T5EG1 SC4812ET 800 MHz 1X/EVDO User Manual Exhibit 8

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	492635
Application ID	GOdZ8TLUhUmJsq58iXkDfg==
Document Description	Exhibit 8
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	225.11kB (2813923 bits)
Date Submitted	2004-11-30 00:00:00
Date Available	2004-11-30 00:00:00
Creation Date	2001-04-02 14:04:18
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Document Lastmod	2001-04-11 14:59:13
Document Title	Exhibit 8

BTS Optimization/ATP
CDMA LMF
Software Release 2.16.X
SC
4812ET
1.9 GHz and 800 MHz CDMA
English
Apr 2001
68P09253A74–O
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from
any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has
been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions.
Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and
to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc.
does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it
convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean
that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted
Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and
other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,
reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted
Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied,
reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the
purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license
under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and
may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the
software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,
manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe
controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or
implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiled
herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright
 Copyright 2001 Motorola, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Printed on
Recyclable Paper
REV010598
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
DRAFT
Table of Contents
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
CDMA 1.9 GHz and 800 MHz
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
FCC Part 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
FCC Part 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
Patent Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
Chapter 1: Introduction
Optimization Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Initial Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Using CDMA LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
Test Equipment Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42
Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-59
RFDS Setup and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71
Alarms Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-82
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Table of Contents – continued
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
TX Code Domain Power Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Generate an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Chapter 5: Leaving the Site
External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Reset All Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
LMF Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Basic Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
RFDS – Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
. . . continued on next page
ii
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Table of Contents – continued
Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North
American PCS Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
Appendix G: In–Service Calibration
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-10
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
iii
List of Figures
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
CDMA 1.9 GHz and 800 MHz
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
Figure 1-2: Typical Logical BTS Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
Figure 1-3: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
Figure 1-4: RF Cabinet Internal FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-17
Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET C–CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Figure 1-7: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
Figure 1-8: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Figure 1-9: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Figure 1-11: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed
for Clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27V DC Terminal Locations
2-9
Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Figure 3-6: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35
Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-45
. . . continued on next page
iv
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
List of Figures – continued
Figure 3-9: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935) . . . . . . . . . . .
3-46
Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest . . . . . . . . . .
3-47
Figure 3-11: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest,
HP 8935 and Advantest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48
Figure 3-12: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-49
Figure 3-13: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55
Figure 3-14: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56
Figure 3-15: Battery Overtemperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
Figure 3-16: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . .
3-89
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) . . .
D-1
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency
Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and
GPIB without Rubidium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB
with Rubidium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-4
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz
Rubidium Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-7
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz
Rubidium Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-8
Figure F-5: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
F-13
Figure F-6: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-16
Figure F-7: Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-17
Figure F-8: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-20
Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-6
Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-7
Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-8
Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-9
Figure G-7: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler . . . . . . .
G-11
Figure G-8: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-12
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
List of Tables
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
CDMA 1.9 GHz and 800 MHz
Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
Table 1-3: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID
Numbers (Top Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
Table 1-4: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID
Numbers (Bottom Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Table 1-6: Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Table 2-4: Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Table 2-6: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection . . . .
3-14
Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
Table 3-7: Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Table 3-8: BTS GUI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Table 3-9: BTS CLI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Table 3-10: BTS GUI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Table 3-11: BTS CLI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Table 3-12: Establishing MMI Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
. . . continued on next page
vi
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
List of Tables – continued
Table 3-14: Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . .
3-34
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40
Table 3-21: Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43
Table 3-22: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab . .
3-51
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
Table 3-24: Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
Table 3-25: Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54
Table 3-26: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55
Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56
Table 3-28: Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57
Table 3-29: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
Table 3-30: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61
Table 3-31: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
Table 3-32: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
Table 3-33: BTS TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-65
Table 3-34: Download BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-66
Table 3-35: TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-68
Table 3-36: All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-69
Table 3-37: Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-70
Table 3-38: RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-72
Table 3-39: Definition of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-73
Table 3-40: Valid NAM Field Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74
Table 3-41: Measuring Directional Coupler Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-75
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-77
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-78
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80
Table 3-45: Program NAM Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-81
Table 3-46: Heat Exchanger Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
Table 3-47: Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
vii
List of Tables
– continued
Table 3-49: Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-84
Table 3-50: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-84
Table 3-51: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
Table 3-54: Battery Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
Table 3-55: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-88
Table 3-56: Check Before Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-89
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Table 5-4: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-5: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . . .
6-2
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer
Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Table 6-7: LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure .
6-8
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor
Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s) . .
6-15
Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2 . . . . .
6-15
Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2s . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-20: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic . . . . . . .
6-16
. . . continued on next page
viii
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
List of Tables – continued
Table 6-21: No MCC24 Channel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
Table 6-25: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation – All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path . . . . .
6-20
Table 6-28: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Table A-2: Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier
and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier
Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or
4–Carrier Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier
Non–adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-13
Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-15
Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
Table B-3: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel
Connections Without Rubidium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel
Connections With Rubidium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
Table F-3: System Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-5
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
ix
List of Tables
– continued
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-9
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-9
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) . . . . . . .
F-10
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using
Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-14
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-17
Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-19
Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-4
Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-7
Table G-4: In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-13
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Product Information
Model & Options Charts
Refer to the SC 4812ET Field Replaceable Units manual
(68P64113A24) for detailed model structure and option information
This document covers only the steps required to verify the functionality
of the Base transceiver Subsystem (BTS) equipment prior to system
level testing, and is intended to supplement site specific application
instructions. It also should be used in conjunction with existing product
manuals. Additional steps may be required.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
68P09253A74
DRAFT
xi
FCC Part 15
FCC Part 15 Requirements
This section conveys FCC Part 15 requirements for the T/ET/ETL series
BTS cabinets.
Part 15.19a(3) – INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Part 15.21 – INFORMATION TO USER
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Motorola could void your authority to operate the
equipment.
xii
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
FCC Part 15 – continued
15.105(b) – INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment OFF and ON, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
xiii
FCC Part 68
FCC Part 68 Requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and regulations. A label inside the cabinet
frame easily visible with the door open in the upper portion of the
cabinet contains, among other information, the FCC Registration
Number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. If
requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of the devices which may
connect to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may
result in the devices not ringing in response to incoming calls. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To
be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as
determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to
determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If the dial–in site access modem causes harm to the telephone network,
the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify you of the discontinuance as
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your dial–in
site access modem. If this happens, the telephone company will provide
advance notice so that you can modify your equipment as required to
maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with the dial–in site access modem, please
contact:
Motorola Cellular Service Center (MCSC)
1501 W. Shure Drive
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
Phone Number: (847) 632–5390
for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to
the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to
disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is solved.
You should not attempt to repair this equipment yourself. This
equipment contains no customer or user–serviceable parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could
void your authority to operate this equipment.
xiv
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Foreword
Scope of manual
This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system
craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system
equipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of this
information has a general understanding of telephony, as used in the
operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and is
familiar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellular
mobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is not
expected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internal
operation of the equipment.
This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment
training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or
enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
Text conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out
information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the
surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.
The four categories of these special paragraphs are:
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that
you can use.
IMPORTANT
Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable
situation or provides additional information to help you
understand a topic or concept.
CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation in which
equipment damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to
equipment.
WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially
hazardous situation in which there is a possibility of
personal injury.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
xv
Foreword – continued
The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of
software information:In text, typewriter style characters represent
prompts and the system output as displayed on a Hyperterminal screen.
Changes to manual
Changes that occur after the printing date are incorporated into your
manual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in this
manual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options and
procedures become available for general use or when engineering
changes occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should be
retained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a list
of all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.
Receiving updates
Technical Education & Documentation (TED) maintains a customer
database that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered or shipped
since the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also identified
in this database is a “key” individual (such as Documentation
Coordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updates
from TED as they are released.
To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it is
important that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.
Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to the
information in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),
please contact Technical Education & Documentation at:
MOTOROLA, INC.
Technical Education & Documentation
1 Nelson C. White Parkway
Mundelein, Illinois 60060
U.S.A.
Phone:
Within U.S.A. and Canada . . . . . 800-872-8225
Outside of U.S.A. and Canada . . +1-847-435–5700
FAX: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +1-847-435–5541
Reporting manual errors
In the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in your
manual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure to
include your name and address, the complete manual title and part
number (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the page
number (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,
and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. We
appreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.
xvi
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Foreword – continued
24-hour support service
If you have any questions or concerns regarding the operation of your
equipment, please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for
immediate assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:
Arlington Heights, IL . . . . . . . . .
Arlington Heights, International .
Cork, Ireland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swindon, England . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800–433–5202
+1–847–632–5390
44–1793–565444
44–1793–565444
Material Available from
Motorola Infrastructure Group
Worldwide Cellular Services
Material available from Motorola Infrastructure Group Worldwide
Cellular Services, identified by a Motorola part number can be ordered
from your sales account manager or by calling (800) 453–7988.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
xvii
General Safety
Remember! . . . Safety
depends on you!!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in
this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow
these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged
into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a
three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact
adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an
electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and
mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Do not operate in an explosive
atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment
constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:
 not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service
Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove
equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component
replacement, or any internal adjustment.
 not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
removed.
 always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
xviii
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
General Safety – continued
Use caution when exposing or
handling the CRT
Breakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity
scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,
avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be
handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety
mask and gloves.
Do not substitute parts or
modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Dangerous procedure
warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous
procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the
warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety
precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment
in your operating environment.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and
adjusting .
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
xix
Revision History
Manual Number
68P09253A74–1
Manual Title
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
CDMA 1.9 GHz and 800 MHz
Version Information
The following table lists the manual version , date of version, and
remarks on the version.
xx
Version
Level
Date of
Issue
Remarks
April 2001
Preliminary DRAFT of document
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Patent Notification
Patent numbers
This product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of the
following patents and other patents pending:
4128740
4193036
4237534
4268722
4282493
4301531
4302845
4312074
4350958
4354248
4367443
4369516
4369520
4369522
4375622
4485486
4491972
4517561
4519096
4549311
4550426
4564821
4573017
4581602
4590473
4591851
4616314
4636791
4644351
4646038
4649543
4654655
4654867
Apr 2001
4661790
4667172
4672657
4694484
4696027
4704734
4709344
4710724
4726050
4729531
4737978
4742514
4751725
4754450
4764737
4764849
4775998
4775999
4797947
4799253
4802236
4803726
4811377
4811380
4811404
4817157
4827507
4829543
4833701
4837800
4843633
4847869
4852090
4860281
4866710
4870686
4872204
4873683
4876740
4881082
4885553
4887050
4887265
4893327
4896361
4910470
4914696
4918732
4941203
4945570
4956854
4970475
4972355
4972432
4979207
4984219
4984290
4992753
4998289
5020076
5021801
5022054
5023900
5028885
5030793
5031193
5036515
5036531
5038399
5040127
5041699
5047762
5048116
5055800
5055802
5058136
5060227
5060265
5065408
5067139
5068625
5070310
5073909
5073971
5075651
5077532
5077741
5077757
5081641
5083304
5090051
5093632
5095500
5105435
5111454
5111478
5113400
5117441
5119040
5119508
5121414
5123014
5127040
5127100
5128959
5130663
5133010
5140286
5142551
5142696
5144644
5146609
5146610
5152007
5155448
5157693
5159283
5159593
5159608
5170392
5170485
5170492
5182749
5184349
5185739
5187809
5187811
5193102
5195108
5200655
5203010
5204874
5204876
5204977
5207491
5210771
5212815
5212826
5214675
5214774
5216692
5218630
5220936
5222078
5222123
5222141
5222251
5224121
5224122
5226058
5228029
5230007
5233633
5235612
5235614
5239294
5239675
5241545
5241548
5241650
5241688
5243653
5245611
5245629
5245634
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
5247544
5251233
5255292
5257398
5259021
5261119
5263047
5263052
5263055
5265122
5268933
5271042
5274844
5274845
5276685
5276707
5276906
5276907
5276911
5276913
5276915
5278871
5280630
5285447
5287544
5287556
5289505
5291475
5295136
5297161
5299228
5301056
5301188
DRAFT
5301353
5301365
5303240
5303289
5303407
5305468
5307022
5307512
5309443
5309503
5311143
5311176
5311571
5313489
5319712
5321705
5321737
5323391
5325394
5327575
5329547
5329635
5339337
D337328
D342249
D342250
D347004
D349689
RE31814
xxi
Patent Notification – continued
Notes
xxii
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
Table of Contents
Apr 2001
Optimization Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope of This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA LMF Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Optimize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is Optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-10
1-11
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Cabinet Internal FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cabinet Internal FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
1-13
1-13
1-16
1-17
1-23
1-26
1-27
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization Overview
Scope of This Document
This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and
audit tests of Motorola SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)
equipment frames equipped with trunked high–power Linear Power
Amplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.
This document assumes the following prerequisites: The BTS frames
and cabling have been installed per the BTS Hardware Installation Manual
– 68P64114A22, which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC series
equipment frames, and the specific cabling configurations.
Document Composition
This document covers the following major areas:
 Introduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such
as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be
considered by the Cell Site Field Engineer (CFE) before optimization
or tests are performed.
 Preliminary Operations, consisting of cabinet power up and power
down procedures.
 Optimization/calibration, covering topics of Local Maintenance
Facility (LMF) connection to the BTS equipment, Global Positioning
System (GPS) Verification, test equipment setup, downloading all
BTS processor boards, RF path verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO)
calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency Diagnostic
System (RFDS) calibration.
 Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs), consisting of ATP tests executed
by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit (TX) and
receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment.
 Preparing to leave the site, presents instructions on how to properly
exit customer site, ensure that all equipment is operating properly, and
all work is complete according to Motorola guidelines.
 Basic troubleshooting, consisting of procedures for installation,
calibration, transmit and receive tests, backplane problems, GPS
failures, and module connectors.
 Appendices contain pertinent Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset,
frequency programming, output power data tables, data sheets that are
filled out manually by the CFE at the site, and information on test
equipment preparation.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-1
1
Optimization Overview – continued
CDMA LMF Product Description
The Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) LMF is a graphical user
interface (GUI) based LMF. This product is specifically designed to
provide cellular communications field personnel the vehicle to support
the following CDMA BTS operations:
Installation
Maintenance
Calibration
Optimization
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
cannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help
from the menu bar.
Why Optimize?
Proper optimization and calibration assures:
 Accurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.
 Accurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.
What Is Optimization?
Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal
equipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexer
assemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of the
BTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that the
combined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and
built-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causing
improper site operation.
Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive and
transmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.
 The RX path starts at the ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX
directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the RX input port
on the rear of the frame, through the DDRCs, Multicoupler Preselector
Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry, ending at a CDMA
Channel Processor (C–CCP) backplane Broad Band Transceiver
(BBX) slot in the C–CCP shelf.
 A transmit path starts at the BBX, through the C–CCP backplane slot,
travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the rear of
the input/output (I/O) Panel. If the RFDS option is added, then the
TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directional
coupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipment
frame.
. . . continued on next page
1-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization Overview – continued
These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leaving
only site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics
to be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated
Power (ERP) output power requirements.
Each C–CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TX
antenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs
1–12, and is optimized to all antenna ports). A single value is generated
for each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would
occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of
each element in the path.
When to Optimize
New Installations
After the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.
This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power
up, and GPS verification. Basic alarm tests are also addressed.
A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths is performed to verify factory
calibration.
A series of ATP CDMA verification tests are covered using the actual
equipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site can be placed
in service.
Site Expansion
Optimization is also required after expansion of a site.
Periodic Optimization
Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the
requirements of the overall system.
Repaired Sites
Verify repair(s) made to the BTS by consulting an Optimization/ATP
Test Matrix table. This table outlines the specific tests that must be
performed anytime a BTS subassembly or RF cable associated with it is
replaced.
IMPORTANT
Apr 2001
Refer to Appendix B for detailed basic guideline tables and
detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-3
1
Optimization Overview – continued
Required Documents
The following documents are required to perform optimization of the
cell site equipment:
 Site document (generated by Motorola systems engineering), which
includes:
– General site information
– Floor plans
– Power levels
– Site PN
– Site paging and traffic channel allocation
– Board placement
– Site wiring lists
– Cell–site Data Files (CDF)
 Demarcation document (scope of work agreement)
 Equipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment.
Additional Information
For other information, refer to the following manuals:
 CDMA LMF Operators Guide
Delivered as on-line help with your system
 4812ET Field Replacement Units Guide
(Motorola part number 68P09253A48)
 SC 4812ET RF & Power Cabinet Hardware Installation Manual
(Motorola part number 68P09253A93)
 Logical BTS Implementation
(Motorola part number 68P09253A79)
Test Equipment Overview
The LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended test
equipment, and it is a part of a “calibrated test set.” To ensure consistent,
reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended test
equipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTS
equipment. Table 1-1 outlines the supported test equipment that meets the
technical criteria required for BTS optimization.
Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table
Item
Description
Hewlett Packard, model
HP 8921A
Cellular communications analyzer
(includes 83203B CDMA interface
option)
Hewlett Packard, model
HP 83236A
PCS interface for PCS band
. . . continued on next page
1-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization Overview – continued
Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table
Item
Description
Hewlett Packard, model
HP 8935
Cellular cmmunications analyzer
Motorola CyberTest
Cellular communications analyzer
Advantest R3465 with
3561 CDMA option
Cellular communications analyzer
Gigatronix 8541C
Power meter
HP437B
Power meter
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,
test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used to
optimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute test
equipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMF
meeting the same technical specifications.
LMF Hardware Requirements
An LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (or
better) is recommended:
Notebook computer
64 MB RAM
266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processor
4 Gbyte internal hard disk drive
Color display with 1024 x 768 (recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel
resolution
CD ROM drive
3 1/2 inch floppy drive
Serial port (COM 1)
Parallel port (LPT 1)
PCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)
with a 10Base–T–to–coax adapter
 Windows 98/NT operating system
NOTE
If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window
must be maximized after it is displayed.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-5
1
Optimization Overview – continued
Required Test Equipment
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,
test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used to
optimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute test
equipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMF
meeting the same technical specifications.
NOTE
During manual testing, you can substitute test equipment
with other test equipment models not supported by the
LMF, but those models must meet the same technical
specifications.
The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurement
variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced
as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or
troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on hand
and operating properly.
Test Equipment Calibration
Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment
service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.
Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended
maintenance and calibration schedules closely.
Test Cable Calibration
Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorola
recommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test
cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss
within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable
insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.
Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMF
during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test
cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the
characterization information prior to field optimization.
Equipment Warm–up
After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and
turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as
possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed–up for
a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDS
calibration procedures.
 Communications test set
 Rubidium time base
 Power meter
1-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization Overview – continued
Test Equipment List
The following pieces of test equipment are required during the
optimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers and
frame keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manual
on all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand their
individual operation prior to use in optimization.
NOTE
Always refer to specific OEM test equipment
documentation for detailed operating instructions.
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter
Ethernet LAN transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCPQ1700)
 PCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP adapter: 3COM model –
Etherlink III 3C589B
Transition Engineering model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2
converter
NOTE
Xircom model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to
interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.
RS–232 to GPIB Interface
 National Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X
RS232 serial null modem cable (see Figure 1-1) or equivalent; used to
interface the LMF to the test equipment.
 Standard RS–232 cable can be used with the following modifications:
– This solution passes only the 3 minimum electrical connections
between the LMF and the GPIB interface. The control signals are
jumpered as enabled on both ends of the RS–232 cable (9–pin D).
TX and RX signals are crossed as null modem effect. Pin 5 is the
ground reference.
– Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together on
each connector.
Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail
9–PIN D–FEMALE
GND
RX
TX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
9–PIN D–FEMALE
ON BOTH CONNECTORS
SHORT PINS 7, 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6
GND
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
FW00362
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-7
1
Optimization Overview – continued
Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit
 Motorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on
opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null
modem transformation between cables. This board can used for
10–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.
 Motorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent ; used to interface
the LMF serial port connection to GLI2, CSM and LPA debug serial
ports.
 25 pin D to 25 pin D serial cable from PC to null modem board.
Communications System Analyzer
The communication system analyzer is used during optimization and
testing of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment and
provides the following functions:
(1) Frequency counter
(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)
(3) RF Signal generator (capable of CDMA modulation)
(4) Spectrum analyzer
(5) CDMA code domain analyzer
Four types of communication system analyzers are currently supported
by the LMF:
HP8921A/600 Analyzer – Including 83203B CDMA Interface,
manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCS Interface for 1900 MHz
BTSs.
Advantest R3465 Analyzer – Including R3561L test source unit
HP8935 Analyzer
CyberTest Communication Analyzer
GPIB Cables
 Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) long
used to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.
Power Meter
One of the following power meters is required for TX calibration and
audit if an HP8921A or Advantest R3465 analyzer is used:
 Hewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensor
 Gigatronix model 8541C with model 80601A power sensor
Timing Reference Cables
 Two BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 ft.) long,
used to interconnect the HP8921A/600 or Advantest R3465
communications analyzer to the CSM front panel timing references in
the BTS.
1-8
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization Overview – continued
NOTE
Two Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or
equivalent; right angle MCX–male to standard BNC–male
RG316 cables; 10 ft. long are required to interconnect the
HP8921A/600 communications analyzer to SGLN4132A
and SGLN1145A CSM board timing references.
 BNC “T” adapter with 50 ohm termination.
NOTE
This BNC “T” adapter (with 50 ohm termination) is
required to connect between the HP 8921A/600 (or
Advantest R3465) EVEN SECOND/SYNC IN and the
BNC cable. The BNC cable leads to the 2–second clock
connection on the TIB. Erroneous test results may occur if
the “T” adapter with the 50 ohm termination is not
connected.
Digital Multimeter
 Fluke model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision DC and AC measurements, requiring 4–1/2 digits.
Directional Coupler
 Narda model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01) coupler
terminated with two Narda Model 375BN–M loads, or equivalent.
RF Attenuators
 20 dB fixed attenuators, 20 W (Narda 768–20); used with test cable
calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.
 Narda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01) coupler
terminated with two Narda Model 375BN–M loads, or equivalent.
Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etc
 As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for
various test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (type
N) for calibration and one RF short, two N–type female–to–female
adapters.
High–impedance Conductive Wrist Strap
 Motorola model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with
modules.
RF Load (at least three for trunked cabinets)
 100 W non–radiating RF load; used (as required) to provide dummy
RF loading during BTS transmit tests.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-9
1
Optimization Overview – continued
RF Network Box (and calibrated cables)
 Motorola model SGLN5531A 18:3 Passive Antenna Interface used to
interface test equipment to the BTS receive and transmit antenna
inputs during optimization/ATP or general troubleshooting
procedures.
Optional Equipment
Frequency Counter
 Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.
Spectrum Analyzer
 Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or
equivalent; required for tests other than standard Receive band spectral
purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed by the
LMF.
Local Area Network (LAN) Tester
 Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.
Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment
 As required for local application
RF Test Cable (if not Provided with Test Equipment)
 Motorola model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the
BTS transmitter output during optimization or during general
troubleshooting procedures.
Oscilloscope
 Tektronics model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,
and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.
2–way Splitter
 Mini–Circuits model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; provide the
diversity receive input to the BTS
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
 Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM
and Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)
frequency verification.
1-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization Overview – continued
Abbreviations and
Acronyms
Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
AMR
ATP
BBX2
BLO
BTS
CBSC
C–CCP
CCD
CDMA
CE
CHI
CLI
CIO
CM
CMR
CSM
CSU
DBPF
DBM
DMAC
DRDC
DSP
EMPC
FRU
FSI
GLI 2
GPS
HSO
IFM
I&Q
ISB
LAPD
LFR
LMF
Apr 2001
Definition
Alarm Monitor Reporting
Acceptance Test Plan
Broadband Transceiver
Bay Level Offset
Base Transceiver Subsystem
Centralized Base Station Controller
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
CDMA Clock Distribution
Code Division Multiple Access
Channel Element
Concentration Highway Interface
Command Line Interface
Combiner Input/Output
Channel Module
Cellular Manual Revision
Clock Synchronization Manager
Clock Synchronization Unit
Dual Bandpass Filter
Debug Monitor
Digital Metering and Alarm Control (also see MAP)
Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional Coupler
Digital Signal Processor
Expansion Multicoupler Preselector Card
Field Replaceable Unit
Frame Status Indicator
Group Line Interface II
Global Positioning System
High Stability Oscillator
Integrated Frame Modem
Interphase and Quadrature
InterShelf Bus
Link Access Protocol “D”
Low Frequency Receiver
Local Maintenance Facility
. . . continued on next page
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-11
1
Optimization Overview – continued
Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
LORAN
LPA
MAP
MCC
MGLI
MM
MMI
MPC
OMCR
PCS
PCSC
PN
PSTN
QPSK
RFDS
RSSI
SCAP
TCH
TSI
1-12
Definition
LOng RAnge Navigational
Linear Power Amplifier
Meter Alarm Panel (also refered to as DMAC)
Multi–Channel CDMA
Master Group Line Interface
Mobility Manager
Man Machine Interface
Multicoupler Preselector Card
Operations Maintenance Center – Radio
Personal Communication System
Personal Communication System Controller
Pseudo–random Noise
Public Switched Telephone Network
Quadrature Phase Shift Keyed
Radio Frequency Diagnostic Subsystem
Received Signal Strength Indicator
Super Cell Application Protocol
Traffic Channel
Time Slot Interchanger
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification
Equipment Overview
The SC 4812ET BTS consists of an RF Cabinet that is an outdoor,
weatherized version of the SC 4812T. The RF cabinet is powered by
27 Vdc and each cabinet has the capability to support up to 4 carriers (at
3 sector) or 2 carriers (at 6 sector).
The RF Cabinet houses the fan modules, C–CCP, LPA modules, LPA
trunking backplane, Bandpass 2:1 & 4:1 Combiners, Duplexer/Receive
Filter/Directional Couplers (DRDC) and a DC Power distribution
assembly. The Power Cabinet (PC) provides +27 Vdc distribution and
battery backup for the SC 4812ET. The Power Cabinet houses batteries,
battery heaters, rectifiers, an AC Load Center (ACLC), a power
distribution assembly, and two duplexed GFCI convenience outlets.
Logical BTS
A logical BTS can consist of up to four SC 4812ET frames. When the
LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logical BTS, you can access all
devices in all of the frames that make up the logical BTS. A logical BTS
CDF file that includes equippage information for all of the logical BTS
frames and their devices is required. A Centralized Base Station
Controller (CBSC) file that includes channel data for all of the logical
BTS fames is also required.
The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (e.g., BTS–812–1) and
other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, –101, –201,
and –301 (e. g. BTS–812–201). When you log into a BTS a FRAME
tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,
there will only be one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1) for BTS–282. If a
logical BTS has more than one frame, there will be a separate FRAME
tab for each frame (e.g. FRAME–438–1, FRAME–438–101, and
FRAME–438–202 for a BTS–438 that has all three frames). If an
RFDS is included in the CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1)
will be displayed.
Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one or
more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen
for information on how to select devices.
C–CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers
All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a
single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers
dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to
Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 for specific C–CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-13
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Table 1-3: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)
Frame
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
Power Power Power AMR GLI2
(PS–1) (PS–2) (PS–3) –1
–1
MCC2
BBX2
BBX2
–R
MPC/
EMPC
–1
–
–
–
R1
–
101
–
–
–
101
101
101
102
103
104
105
106
101
102
103
104
105
106
R101
–
201
–
–
–
201
201
201
202
203
204
205
206
201
202
203
204
205
206
R201
–
301
–
–
–
301
301
301
302
303
304
305
306
301
302
303
304
305
306
R301
–
Table 1-4: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)
Frame
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
HSO/ CSM CSM CCD CCD
LFR
–1
–2
AMR GLI2–
–2
MCC2
10
11
12
10
12
–
–
–
–
–
101
–
101
102
–
–
–
102
102
107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112
–
–
201
–
201
202
–
–
–
202
102
207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212
–
–
301
–
301
302
–
–
–
302
102
307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312
–
–
DRAFT
11
MPC/
EMPC
–2
–
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
SW
1-14
BBX2
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-2: Typical Logical BTS Configurations
Two Frame Configuration
BTSSPAN
Three Frame Configuration
BTSSPAN
BTSSPAN 110
Frame
BTSSPAN 110
Frame
Frame
101
BTSSPAN 211
Frame
101
Frame
201
Four Frame Configuration
BTSSPAN
BTSSPAN 110
Frame
BTSSPAN 211
Frame
101
BTSSPAN 310
Frame
201
Frame
301
REF FW00485
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-15
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Major Components
The major components that make up the Motorola SC 4812ET are
illustrated in this section: the RF Cabinet (see Figure 1-3) and the Power
Cabinet (see Figure 1-10).
Figure 1-3: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
RF I/O
Area Cover Plate
Main Door
Rear Conduit Panel
LPA Door
(Can only be opened after Main Door is open)
Rear DC Conduit Panel
Rear I/O Door
FW00189
1-16
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
RF Cabinet Internal
FRUs
Figure 1-4 shows the location of the Internal Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in the
following paragraphs.
Figure 1-4: RF Cabinet Internal FRUs
EBA
ETIB
CCP Fans
RFDS
C–CCP Shelf
5 RU Rack Space
Combiner
Cage
OPTIONAL AREA
DC
Power
Dist.
Punch
Block
(back)
Circuit
Breaker Panel
DRDC
LPA Trunking
Backplane
LPA’s
FW00163
Duplexer/Directional Coupler
The DRDC combines, in a single module, the functions of antenna
duplexing, receive band pass filtering, and surge protection
(see.Figure 1-8).
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-17
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Combiner Cage (2:1, 4:1, or Band pass Filter)
The Combiner Cage holds the transmit band pass filters, 2:1 combiners,
or 4:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.
Combined CDMA Channel Processor Shelf
The C–CCP shelf contains the following (see Figure 1-5):
 High Stability Oscillator (HSO) or Low Frequency Receiver (LFR)
card (1)
 Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)card (2 – one with GPS
receiver)
 CDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)
 Power Supply cards (2 minimum, 3 maximum)
 Multicoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) or Expansion Multicoupler
1-18
Preselector Cards (EMPC) (2)
Alarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)
Multi Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24s or MCC–1Xs) cards (up to
12)
Broadband Transceiver (BBX2s or BBX–1Xs) cards (up to 13)
Combined Input/Output (CIO) card (1)
Group Line Interface (GLI2) cards (2)
BBX2 Switch card (1)
Modem (optional)
Filler Panels (as required)
Fan Module (3)
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET C–CCP Shelf
SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
ETIB
EBA
MPC/EMPC–1
5 RU RACK
SPACE
MPC/EMPC–2
Switch
BBX2–12
BBX2–11
BBX2–10
BBX2–9
BBX2–8
BBX2–7
MCC24–12
MCC24–11
MCC24–10
MCC24–9
MCC24–8
MCC24–7
GLI2
AMR
MODEM
CCD
CSM
CSM
HSO/LFR
CCD
CIO
BBX2–6
BBX2–R
BBX2–5
BBX2–4
BBX2–3
BBX2–2
BBX2–1
MCC24–6
MCC24–5
MCC24–4
MCC24–3
MCC24–2
GLI2
MCC24–1
AMR
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
19 mm Filter Panel
RFDS
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC8Es, MCC24s or
MCC–1Xs. BBXs may
be BBX2s or
BBX–1Xs.
REF FW00304
Punch Block
The Punch Block is the interface point of the RF Cabinet between the
T1/E1 span lines, the Customer I/O, alarms, multi–cabinet timing
(RGPS and RHSO), and Pilot Beacon control (optional). (see
Figure 1-7).
Span I/O Board
The Span I/O Board provides the interface for the span lines from the
CSU to the C–CCP backplane (see Figure 1-7).
RF Diagnostic Subsystem
The RFDS provides the capability for remotely monitoring the status of
the SC 4812ET RF Transmit and Receive paths (Figure 1-8).
Heat Exchanger
The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the internal compartment of the
RF Cabinet. The fan speed of the heat exchangers adjusts automatically
with temperature. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front
door of the RF Cabinet.
SC 4812ET Interface Board (ETIB) & LPA Control Brd (LPAC)
The ETIB is an interconnect board showing status LEDs for the RF
Cabinet, as well as providing secondary surge protection. The LPAC
board provides the interface for the LPA connection.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-19
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
SC 4812ET Trunking Backplane
The Trunking Backplane contains a complex passive RF network that
allows RF signals to share the resources of a bank of four LPAs. It also
provides DC Power and digital interconnect.
Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View)
RF CABINET
(Rear View)
Exp. Punch
Block
RF Expansion
Punch
Block
Microwave
27V
RF GPS
1–3 Sector Antennas
RFDS Expansion
27V Ret
LAN
4–6 Sector Antennas
FW00147
2 Sec Tick
19 MHz Clock
Ground Cable
Lugs
Expansion 1
Expansion 2
1-20
RF CABINET
(Rear Door closed)
DC Conduit
RGPS
RFGPS
Pilot Beacon
Span/Alarm
SPAN I/O
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-7: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram
20 Pair
Punchblock
(RGPS)
1A
2A
3A
1B
2B
3B
4A
5A
6A
4B
5B
6B
RGD/RGPS
50 Pair
Punch
Block
2A
3A
1B
Power Input
+27V
Micro–
(Alarms/Spans) wave
RF Expansion Ports
1A
RGD
Board
RF
GPS
2B
LAN
3B
IN OUT
Remote
ASU
4A
5A
6A
4B
5B
6B
19 MHz
Spans
Modem
Alams
Antenna’s
Power Input
27V Ret
2 Sec
GND
Lugs
FW00171
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-21
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-8: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
FRONT VIEW
RFDS
(door not shown for clarity)
WALL
MOUNTING
BRACKET
DRDC
BTS
CPLD
ANT
CPLD
3B 2B 1B 3A 2A 1A
DRDC CAGE
6B 5B 4B 6A 5A 4A
FW00170
1-22
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Sector Configuration
There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5
outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater than
two, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,
bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on
sectorization and channel sequencing.
Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration
Number of
carriers
Number of
sectors
3 or 6
Channel spacing
Filter requirements
N/A
Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
Non–adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)
Adjacent
Dual Band Pass Filter
Non–adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
Adjacent
Bandpass Filter
3,4
Non–adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)
3,4
Adjacent
Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)
The matrix in Table 1-6 shows a correlation between the various sector
configurations and BBX cards.
NOTE
In Table 1-6, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX–1Xs.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-23
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Table 1-6: Sector Configurations
Config Ref. No.
Description
3–Sector/2–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavity
combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6
total).
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
N/A
N/A
BBX–5
BBX–6
6–Sector/2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity
combiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non–adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
BBX–10
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX–5
BBX–6
BBX–11
BBX–12
3–Sector/2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity
combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non–adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
N/A
N/A
N/A
3–Sector/4–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners
for 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–12
3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for
3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
3–Sector/3 or 4–NON–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 4:1
cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non–adjacent channels.
1-24
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
N/A
N/A
N/A
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–12
N/A
N/A
N/A
6–Sector/1–Carrier – The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavity
combiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
TX6
Carrier#
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-9: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
2 to 1 Combiner
3 Sector or 6 Sector
4 to 1 Combiner
3 Sector Only
EBA
ETIB
EBA
ETIB
RFDS
RFDS
C1, S1–S3
C1
(C1, S1–S3)
C2, S1–S3
C2
(C2, S1–S3)
5 RU RACK
SPACE
5 RU RACK
SPACE
C3, S1–S3
C3
(C1, S4–S6)
C4, S1–S3
C4
(C2, S4–S6)
Dual Bandpass Filter
Sector
Numbering
3 Sector
(6 Sector)
3 Sector Only
2 Carrier Maximum
EBA
ETIB
RFDS
C1, S1–S3
(C1, S1–S3)
C2, S1–S3
(C2, S1–S3)
5 RU RACK
SPACE
C3, S1–S3
(C1, S4–S6)
C4, S1–S3
(C2, S4–S6)
FW00166
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-25
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Power Cabinet
Figure 1-10 illustrates the Power Cabinet design.
Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet
GFCI Outlet
Cover
Battery Door
Rear I/O
Door
Rear DC
Conduit Panel
Main Door
Rear AC Conduit
Panel
FW00193
1-26
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Power Cabinet Internal
FRUs
Figure 1-11 shows the location of the Internal Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in the
following paragraphs.
Figure 1-11: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity)
Rectifier
Alarm Module
Temperature
Control Module
Rectifier
Shelves
Batteries (Battery
Heaters located
under batteries)
GFCI Outlets
(Back)
NOTE
Punch Block is not
visible in this view.
DC Circuit
Breakers
AC Load
Center
FW00164
FRONT VIEW POWER CABINET
Batteries
The batteries provide a +24 Vdc backup to the RF Cabinet should AC
Power be lost. The Power Cabinet can accommodate a total of 24 12–V
batteries, configured in 12 strings of 2 batteries each. The time duration
of backup provided depends on system configuration.
Battery Heater
The battery heaters provide heating to the batteries in the Power Cabinet.
A separate heater is required for each string of batteries. The heater is a
pad the batteries sit on located top of each battery shelf. The number of
heaters is dependent on system configuration.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
1-27
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Battery Compartment Fan
The battery compartment fan provides air circulation for the two battery
compartments. It is located on the inside of the battery compartment
door.
Heat Exchanger
The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the rectifier compartment of the
Power Cabinet. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front door
of the Power Cabinet.
Rectifiers
The +27 Vdc rectifiers convert the AC power supplied to the Power
Cabinet to +27 Vdc to power the RF Cabinet and maintain the charge of
the batteries.
AC Load Center
The ACLC is the point of entry for AC Power to the Power Cabinet. It
incorporates AC power distribution and surge protection.
Punch Block
The Punch Block is the interface for the alarm signalling between the
Power Cabinet and the RF Cabinet.
1-28
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations
Table of Contents
Apr 2001
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cellsite Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Frame C–CCP Shelf Configuration Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
Initial Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cabinet Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Cabinet Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-10
2-10
2-11
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Preliminary Operations: Overview
Introduction
This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying
module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switch
settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS
application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are
presented.
Cellsite Types
Sites are configured as with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3–sectored with a
maximum of 4 carriers, and 6–sectored with a maximum of 2 carriers.
Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
CDF
The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data
information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The
number of modem frames, C–CCP shelves, BBX2 and
MCC24E/MCC8E boards (per cage), and linear power amplifier
assignments are some of the equipage data included in the CDF.
Site Equipage Verification
Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data
to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect
and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and
ancillary equipment frame.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placed
on a conductive surface or back into the anti–static bag it
was shipped in.
Initial Installation of
Boards/Modules
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Step
Action
Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as
required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.
As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number
Checklist” in the site logbook.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
2-1
Preliminary Operations: Overview
– continued
Setting Frame C–CCP Shelf
Configuration Switch
If the frame is a Starter BTS, the backplane switch settings behind the
fan module should be set to the ON position (see Figure 2-1).
The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the
BTS equipment.
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings
ON
OFF
STARTER FRAME
FAN MODULE
REMOVED
EXPANSION
FRAME 1
SETTING
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
ON
OFF
EBA
ETIB
RFDS
SC 4812ET
C–CCP SHELF
5 RU RACK SPACE
EXPANSION
FRAME 2
SETTING
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
BOTTOM / TOP
ON
OFF
FW00167
2-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Initial Power Up
Introduction
The following information is used to check for any electrical short
circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS
power supply units before applying power for the first time. It contains
instructional information on the initial proper power up procedures for
the SC 4812ET power cabinet and RF cabinet. Also presented are tests
to be preformed on the power cabinet. Please pay attention to all
cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury to
personnel.
Required Tools
The following tools are used in the procedures.
 DC current clamp (600 Amp capability with jaw size to accommodate
2/0 cable).
 Hot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)
 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems
Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly
connected:
 Receive RF cabling – up to 12 RX cables
 Transmit RF cabling – up to six TX cables
IMPORTANT
For positive power applications (+27 V):
 The positive power cable is red.
 The negative power cable is black. (The black power
cable is at ground potential.)
Initial Inspection and Setup
CAUTION
Ensure all battery breakers for unused battery positions are
open (pulled out) during any part of the power up process,
and remain in the off position when leaving the site.
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup
Step
Action
Verify that ALL AC and DC breakers are turned OFF in both the Power and RF cabinets. Verify that
the DC power cables between the Power and RF cabinets are connected with the correct polarity
The RED cables connect to the uppermost three (3) terminals (marked +) in both cabinets. Confirm
that the split phase 240/120 AC supply is correctly connected to the AC load center input.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
2-3
Initial Power Up – continued
CAUTION
Failure to connect the proper AC feed will damage the
surge protection module inside the AC load center.
Power Up Sequence
The first task in the power up sequence is to apply AC power to the
Power cabinet. Once power is applied a series of AC Voltage
measurements is required.
Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements
Step
Action
Measure the AC voltages connected to the AC load center (access the terminals from the rear of the
cabinet after removing the AC load center rear panel). See Figure 2-2.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 V AC.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 V AC.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 V AC.
Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally
115 to 120 V AC.
Measure L1 – L2 – should be from 208 to 240 V AC.
CAUTION
If the AC voltages are in excess of 120 V (or exceed
200 V) when measuring between terminals L1 or L2 to
neutral or ground, STOP and Do Not proceed until the
cause of the higher voltages are determined. The power
cabinet WILL be damaged if the Main breaker is turned
on with excessive voltage on the inputs.
2-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring
L1
L2
= Ground
= Neutral
= Line 1
= Line 2
L1
L2
AC to Pilot Beacon
FW00305
Applying AC Power
Once AC Voltage Measurements are complete, apply AC power to the
Power Cabinet. Table 2-4 provides the procedure for applying AC
power.
Table 2-4: Applying AC Power
Step
Action
When the input voltages are verified as correct, turn the Main AC breaker (located on the front of the
AC Load Center) ON. Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the AC Load Center are
illuminated (see Figure 2-7).
Turn Rectifier 1 and Rectifier 2 AC branch breakers (on the AC Load Center) ON. All the installed
rectifier modules (see Figure 2-7) will start up and should each have two green LEDs (DC and Power)
illuminated.
Turn the Meter Alarm Panel module, ON (see Figure 2-3), while observing the K2 contact in the
PDA assembly (see Figure 2-9). The contact should close. The Meter Alarm Panel voltage meter
should read approximately 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc.
Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) ON, (see Figure 2-4). Verify that the Meter Alarm
Control Panel does not have any alarm LEDs illuminated.
Check the rectifier current bargraph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None
should be illuminated at this point.
NOTE
If batteries are fitted, turn on the two battery heater AC
breakers on the AC Load Center.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
2-5
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm Panel
VOLT
AMP
AMPS
VOLT
–
PWR
–
TEST POINTS
TEST POINTS
OFF ON
FW00245
FRONT VIEW
Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation Panel
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PANEL
1/2 A 250V
ON
OFF ON
SENSOR
COM 1 2
SENSE
25 c
V ADJ
–
FW00246
FRONT VIEW
Power Cabinet Power Up
Tests
Table 2-5 lists the step–by–step instructions for Power Up Tests.
Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests
Step
Action
Probe the output voltage test point on the Meter Alarm Panel while pressing the 25° C set button on
the TCP (see Figure 2-4). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust Master Voltage on Meter
Alarm Panel if necessary. Release the TCP 25° C set button.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V
compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is
warmer than 25C, the voltage will be lower.
Ensure the RF cabinet 400 Amp main DC breaker is OFF.
Close the three (3) Main DC breakers on the Power Cabinet ONLY. Close by holding in the reset
button on the front of the PDA, and engaging one breaker at a time.
Measure the voltage between the + and – terminals at the rear of the Power Cabinet and the RF
Cabinet, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage should be the same as the measurement in
step 2.
Place the probes across the black and red battery buss bars in each battery compartment. Place the
probe at the bottom of the buss bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should measure
the same as the previous step.
2-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Initial Power Up – continued
DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)
Before applying any power to the BTS cabinet, verify there are no shorts
in the RF or power DC distribution system (see Figure 2-5).
Table 2-6: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Physically verify that all AC rectifiers supplying power to the RF cabinets are OFF or disabled (see
Figure 2-5). There should be no 27 Vdc on DC feed terminals.
On each RF cabinet:
 Unseat all circuit boards/ modules in the distribution shelf, transceiver shelf, and Single Carrier
Linear Power Amplifier (SCLPA) shelves, but leave them in their associated slots.
 Unseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C–CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but
leave them in their associated slots.
 Set C–CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled
C–CCP 1, 2, 3 – located on the power distribution panel).
 Set LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (8 breakers,
labeled 1A–1B through 4C–4D – located on the power distribution panel).
Verify that the resistance from the power (+) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on the
cabinet measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-5).
 If reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the
breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or
missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).
Set the 400 Amp Main Breaker and the C–CCP breakers (C–CCP 1, 2, 3) to the ON position by
pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each breaker.
* IMPORTANT
If, after inserting any board/module, the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω, a short probably exists in that
board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the
problem before proceeding.
Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules into their associated slots one at a time. Repeat step3
after inserting each module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge, finally
indicating approximately 500 Ω.
! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
–
(in +27 volt systems)
Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C–CCP shelf.
Repeat step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
2-7
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-6: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Set the 8 LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each
breaker.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.
Repeat step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.
 A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
Seat the Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options breakers one at a time. Repeat step 3.
RF Cabinet Power Up
Table 2-7 covers the procedures for properly powering up the RF
Cabinet.
Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up
Step
Action
Ensure the 400 Amp Main DC breaker and all other breakers in the RF Cabinet are OFF.
Proceed to the DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame) sequence (see Table 2-6) (for initial power–up as
required).
Ensure the power cabinet is turned on (see Table 2-5). Verify that 27 volts is applied to the terminals
on the back of the RF cabinet.
Engage the main DC circuit breaker on the RF cabinet (see Figure 2-5).
On each RF cabinet:
 Set C–CCP shelf breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (labeled
C–CCP 1, 2, 3 – located on the power distribution panel).
 Set LPA breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (8 breakers, labeled 1A–1B
through 4C–4D – located on the power distribution panel).
 Set the two heat exchanger breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time.
 Set the ETIB breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.
 Set the OPTION breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.
. . . continued on next page
2-8
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up
Step
Action
Measure the voltage drop between the Power Cabinet meter test point and the 27 V buss bar inside the
RF Cabinet PDA while the RF Cabinet is transmitting.
NOTE
For a three (3) sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.2 V.
For a twelve (12) sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.3 V.
Using a DC current probe, measure the current in each of the six (6) DC cables that are connected
between the RF and Power Cabinet. The DC current measured should be approximately the same. If
there is a wide variation between one cable and the others (>20 A), check the tightness of the
connections (torque settings) at each end of the cable.
Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27V DC Terminal Locations
400
5 RU RACK
SPACE
MAIN BREAKER
1A
30
1B
1C
30
1D
2A
30
2B
2C
30
2D
3A
30
3B
3C
30
3D
4A
30
4B
4C
30
4D
PS1
50
PS2
50
PS3
50
LPA
BLOWERS
25
SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet
(Front View)
RF CABINET
(Rear View)
HEAT EXCHANGER
CAUTION
SHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERS
25 ONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGER
MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR
PUSH BUTTON
TO RESET
LPA BLOWERS
ETIB
10
OPTION
15
27V Ret
FW00307
Apr 2001
27V
I/O Plate + and – DC Feed
Terminals (Back Panel of RF
Cabinet)
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
2-9
Initial Power Up – continued
Battery Charge Test
(Connected Batteries)
Table 2-8 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the batteries.
Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Step
Action
Close the battery compartment breakers for connected batteries ONLY. This process should be
completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings with excess charge current
NOTE
If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually
due to the surge current. If this condition is observed, turn off the Meter Alarm Panel power switch,
and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers, the Meter Alarm Panel power switch
should then be turned ON.
Using the DC current probe, measure the current in each of the battery string connections to the buss
bars in each battery cabinet. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly reduce in a
few minutes if the batteries have a typical new battery charge level.
The current in each string should be approximately equal (+ 5 A).
The bargraph meters on the rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of the total battery
charge current. Each rectifier module has eight (8) LEDs to represent the output current. Each
illuminated LED indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8 or 8.75 A) of the rectifiers maximum (70 A)
current is flowing.
EXAMPLE:
Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bargraph LEDs
illuminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?
Answer: Each bargraph is approximately indicating 12.5% of 70 A, therefore, 3 X 8.75 equals
26.25 A. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 X 26.25 A) 78.75 A.
This charge current calculation only applies at this part of the start up procedure, when the RF Cabinet
is not powered on, and the power cabinet heat exchanger is turned off.
Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further
action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current
in each string should reduce to less than 5 A.
Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the Power Up
Test.
NOTE
If discharged batteries are installed, all bargraphs may be illuminated on the rectifiers during the
charge test. This indicates that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries.
It is recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above
step before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.
Battery Discharge Test
Perform the test procedure in Table 2-9 only when the battery current is
less than 5 A per string. Refer to Table 2-8 on the procedures for
checking current levels.
2-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Initial Power Up – continued
Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test
Step
Action
Turn the battery test switch on the Meter Alarm Panel, ON (see Figure 2-3). The rectifier output
voltage and current should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms
for the Meter Alarm Panel may occur.
Measure the individual battery string current using the DC current probe. The battery discharge
current in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 A).
Turn Battery Test Switch OFF.
CAUTION
Failure to turn OFF the Battery Test Switch before leaving
the site, will result in low battery capacity and reduce
battery life.
Heat Exchanger Power Up
Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up
Step
Action
Turn the Power Cabinet Heat Exchanger breakers ON (seeFigure 2-6 for breaker location).
The Heat Exchanger will now go into a 5 minute test sequence. Ensure that the internal and external
fans are operating. Place a hand on the internal and external Heat Exchanger grills to feel for air draft.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
2-11
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly
Heat Exchanger
Assembly
Bottom (Ambient) Blower
Mounting
Bracket
Fan Module
Top (Internal) Blower
Blower
Power
Cord
Core
Mounting
Bracket
Fan Module
T–30 Screw
Blower
Power
Cord
T–30 Screw
POWER CABINET
Front View
OUT=OFF
IN=ON
Blower Assembly
Circuit Breaker
Side View
2-12
FW00181
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies
DC Circuit
Breaker
25
160
160
160
25
ON
OFF
BREAKER SYSTEM BREAKER
SHOULD BE RESET
IF ILLUMINATED OR
AFTER RESET OF
BREAKER SYSTEM
3 MAIN BREAKERS
BREAKER
SYSTEM RESET
BUTTON
TO RESET MAIN BREAKERS, PRESS
AND HOLD IN GREEN BUTTON WHILE
PRESSING 160 AMP BREAKER BUTTON
UNTIL LATCHED RELEASE GREEN BUTTON
AFTER ALL 3 BREAKERS HAVE BEEN RESET
POWER CABINET
Front View
ATTENTION
RECTIFIER
SHELF #1
Circuit Breaker Legend:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Shelf #1 . . . .
Rectifier Shelf #2 . . . .
Battery Heater #1 . . . .
Battery Heater #2 . . . .
GFCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECTIFIER
SHELF #2
150 Amp
70 Amp
70 Amp
15 Amp
15 Amp
15 Amp
15 Amp
BATTERY
HEATER #1
BATTERY
HEATER #2
MAIN
CAUTION
LIVE TERMINALS
GFCI
SPARE
LED Status
AC Circuit
Breaker
FW00144
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
2-13
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers
7/16 NUT
AC Circuit Breaker
150 Amp Breaker
POWER CABINET
Front View
5/16 NUT
SCREW
WIRE
LEFT TAB
15 Amp Breaker
RIGHT TAB
SCREW
5/16 NUT
WIRE
WIRE
LEFT TABS
30 Thru 140 Amp Breaker
RIGHT
TABS
FW00145
2-14
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Initial Power Up – continued
Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers
DC Circuit Breaker
9/32 Nut
15 AMP
POWER CABINET
Front View
3x150 AMP
DC Power
Panel Door
Locks
Flat Washer
Lock Washer
FW00146
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
17 mm Nut
2-15
Initial Power Up – continued
Notes
2-16
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration
Table of Contents
Apr 2001
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell–site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell–site Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS System Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Channel Service Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-6
3-9
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA LMF Home Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection . .
Folder Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-16
3-17
3-19
Using CDMA LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic LMF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic LMF Command Line Interface (CLI) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging into a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing an MMI Communication Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-24
3-26
Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI2 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Synchronization Manager System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
3-32
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-32
Table of Contents
– continued
CSM Frequency Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-40
Test Equipment Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42
3-42
3-44
Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50
Selecting Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . .
3-51
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . .
3-52
Calibrating Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
Calibrating Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54
Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . .
3-55
Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . .
3-56
Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Calibrate BLOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLO Calibration Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download BLO Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-59
3-59
3-59
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-63
3-64
3-65
3-67
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-70
RFDS Setup and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS TSU NAM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM . .
Valid NAM Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Directional Coupler Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71
3-71
3-71
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-75
3-77
3-78
3-79
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Table of Contents
– continued
Alarms Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Reporting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure
(Six Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-82
3-82
3-82
3-83
3-83
3-83
3-84
3-84
3-84
3-84
3-85
3-85
3-86
3-88
3-89
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction
Introduction
This chapter provides procedures for downloading system operating
software, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM reference
verification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.
IMPORTANT
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
Optimization Process
After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations
(power up) have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrate
and optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process can be
accomplished as follows:
 Download MGLI2–1 with code and data and then enable MGLI2–1.
 Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of
the following types respond with status information: CSM2, BBX2,
GLI2, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device is
installed and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in
the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF file
will have to be corrected before the device can be accessed by CDMA
LMF.
 Download code and data to all devices of the following types:
– CSM2
– BBX
– GLI2 (other than MGLI2–1)
– MCC
 Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed).
 Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.
 Enable the following devices (in the order listed):
– Secondary CSM (slot 2)
– Primary CSM (slot 1)
– All MCCs
 Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.
 Select the test equipment.
 Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been
calibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for the
optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be
entered manually.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-1
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued
 Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full
optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX
calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests
for all selected devices.
 If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed
paths.
 If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the
failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.
 If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes
for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem that
caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TX
and RX tests have passed for all paths.
Cell–site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type
has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
Cell–site Data File
The CDF includes the following information:
 Download instructions and protocol
 Site specific equipage information
 C–CCP shelf allocation plan
– BBX2 equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy
– CSM equipage including redundancy
– MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC–1X) channel element allocation
plan. This plan indicates how the C–CCP shelf is configured, and
how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel
elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to
12) MCCs in the shelf.
 CSM equipage including redundancy
 Effective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a
transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and
government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the
antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and
antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required
power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX2 output
level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can
also be determined.
NOTE
Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A78,
for additional information on the layout of the LMF
directory structure (including CDF file locations and
formats).
3-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued
BTS System Software
Download
BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS
processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating
code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.
IMPORTANT
Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct
bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files for the BTS must be
obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–# folder in the
LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF files can cause wrong
results. Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a
live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.
The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted
diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has
ftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide,
68P64114A78, or the LMF Help screen, for more information.
Site Equipage Verification
If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, and
review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data
in the CDF to the actual site hardware.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal
and installation of any card/module. After removal, the
card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or
back into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-3
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans
IMPORTANT
– At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the
BTS and place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT
remove the span surge protectors until the
OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Each frame is equipped with one 50–pair punch block for spans,
customer alarms, remote GPS, and power cabinet alarms. See Figure 3-2
and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin call–out
information. To disable the span, pull the surge protectors for the
respective span.
Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must
disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the
CDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending
control information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests.
Configure Channel Service
Unit
The M–PATH 537 Channel Service Unit (CSU) provides in–band
SNMP–managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1 lines.
M–PATH units plug into the ADC Kentrox 2–slot frame (see
Figure 3-1).
Remote M–PATH management is available via SNMP over an in–band
data link on the T1 line (using a facility data link or 8–64 Kbps of a DS0
channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be an
SNMP manager or another M–PATH CSU.
Each 19 inch rack can support two CSU M–PATH 537 modules. Each
M–PATH 537 module supports one and only one span connection.
Programming of the M–PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9–pin
connector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a Microsoft
Windows programming disk is supplied with each unit.
3-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF – continued
Setting the Control Port
Whichever control port is chosen, it must first be set up so the control
port switches match the communication parameters being used by the
control device. If using the rear–panel DTE control port, set the
shelf–address switch SA5 to “up” (leave the switch down for the
rear–panel DCE control port).
For more information, refer to the Kentrox Installation Guide, manual
number 65–77538001 which is provided with each CSU.
Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:
Part Number
Description of Cable
01–95006–022 (six feet)
DB–9S to DB–9P
01–95010–022 (ten feet)
The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:
 A PC using the AT 9–pin interface
 A modem using the 9–pin connector
 Other shelves in a daisy chain
Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU
To/From
Network
To/From
Network
To/From
GLI
DTE
To/From
GLI
DATA PORT
DCE
SLOT 2
T1
DDS
DATA PORT
SLOT 1
T1 TERMINAL
T1
NETWORK
DDS
T1 TERMINAL
NETWORK
CONTROL
PORT
GROUP
ADDRESS
SHELF
ADDRESS
Back View
SLOT 1
DCE Connector
(Craft Port)
Apr 2001
SLOT 2
Front View
REF. FW00212
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-5
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF – continued
Alarm and Span Line Cable
Pin/Signal Information
See Figure 3-2 and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin
call–out information for the 50–pin punch block.
Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block
TO MODEM
CONNECTOR TO ALARMS
CONNECTOR
STRAIN RELIEVE INCOMING
CABLE TO BRACKET WITH
TIE WRAPS
TO LAN
CONNECTOR
RF Cabinet I/O Area
TO RGD/RGPS
CONNECTOR
LEGEND
1T = PAIR 1 – TIP
1R = PAIR 1 –RING
”
”
”
”
”
”
2R
2T
1R
1T
49T
1T 1R 2T 2R
49R
50T
50R
FW00162
TOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCK
3-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF – continued
Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch Block
Site Component
POWER CABINET
LFR / HSO
PILOT BEACON
CUSTOMER
OUTPUTS / INPUTS
Signal Name
Power Cab Control – NC
Power Cab Control – NO
Power Cab Control – Com
Reserved
Rectifier Fail
AC Fail
Power Cab Exchanger Fail
Power Cab Door Alarm
Power Cab Major Alarm
Battery Over Temp
Power Cab Minor Alarm
Reticifier Over Temp
Power Cab Alarm Rtn
LFR_HSO_GND
EXT_1PPS_POS
EXT_1PPS_NEG
CAL_+
CAB_–
LORAN_+
LORAN_–
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Minor
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Rtn
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Major
Pilot Beacon Control – NO
Pilot Beacon Control–COM
Pilot Beacon Control – NC
Customer Outputs 1 – NO
Customer Outputs 1 – COM
Customer Outputs 1 – NC
Customer Outputs 2 – NO
Customer Outputs 2 – COM
Customer Outputs 2 – NC
Customer Outputs 3 – NO
Customer Outputs 3 – COM
Customer Outputs 3 – NC
Customer Outputs 4 – NO
Customer Outputs 4–COM
Customer Outputs 4 – NC
Customer Inputs 1
Cust_Rtn_A_1
Customer Inputs 2
Cust_Rtn_A_2
Customer Inputs 3
Cust_Rtn_A_3
Customer Inputs 4
Cust_Rtn_A_4
Customer Inputs 5
Cust_Rtn_A_5
Customer Inputs 6
Cust_Rtn_A_6
Customer Inputs 7
Cust_Rtn_A_7
Customer Inputs 8
Cust_Rtn_A_8
Customer Inputs 9
Cust_Rtn_A_9
Customer Inputs 10
Cust_Rtn_A_10
Pin
1T
1R
2T
2R
3T
3R
4T
4R
5T
5R
6T
6R
7T
7R
8T
8R
9T
9R
10T
10R
11T
11R
12T
12R
13T
13R
14T
14R
15T
15R
16T
16R
17T
17R
18T
18R
19T
19R
20T
20R
21T
21R
22T
22R
23T
23R
24T
24R
25T
25R
26T
26R
27T
27R
28T
28R
29T
29R
Color
Blue
Blk/Blue
Yellow
N/C
Blk/Yellow
Green
Blk/Grn
White
Blk/Whit
Red
Blk/Red
Brown
Blk/Brn
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-7
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF – continued
Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch Block
Site Component
SPAN
RGPS
Phone Line
Miscellaneous
3-8
Signal Name
RVC_TIP_A
RVC_RING_A
XMIT_TIP_A
XMIT_RING_A
RVC_TIP_B
RVC_RING_B
XMIT_TIP_B
XMIT_RING_B
RVC_TIP_C
RVC_RING_C
XMIT_TIP_C
XMIT_RING_C
RVC_TIP_D
RVC_RING_D
XMIT_TIP_D
XMIT_RING_D
RVC_TIP_E
RVC_RING_E
XMIT_TIP_E
XMIT_RING_E
RVC_TIP_F
RVC_RING_F
XMIT_TIP_F
XMIT_RING_F
GPS_POWER_1+
GPS_POWER_1–
GPS_POWER_2+
GPS_POWER_2–
GPS_RX+
GPS_RX–
GPS_TX+
GPS_TX–
Signal Ground (TDR+)
Master Frame (TDR–)
GPS_lpps+
GPS_lpps–
Telco_Modem_T
Telco_Modem_R
Chasis Ground
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Pin
30T
30R
31T
31R
32T
32R
33T
33R
34T
34R
35T
35R
36T
36R
37T
37R
38T
38R
39T
39R
40T
40R
41T
41R
42T
42R
43T
43R
44T
44R
45T
45R
46T
46R
47T
47R
48T
48R
49T
49R
50T
50R
Color
Blue
Bk/Blue
Yellow
Bk/Yellow
White
White
Green
Green
Red
Bk/Red
Brown
Bk/Brn
Apr 2001
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF – continued
T1/E1 Span Isolation
Table 3-2 describes the action required for span isolation.
Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation
Step
Action
The OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS.
The Span Lines can be disabled by removing the surge protectors on the 50–pin punch block. Using
Table 3-1 locate the span or spans which need to be disabled and remove the respective surge
protector.
NOTE
If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disabling the span
line.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-9
Preparing the LMF
Software and files for installation and updating of the LMF are provided
on CD ROM disks. The following installation items must be available:
 LMF Program on CD ROM
 LMF Binaries on CD ROM
 CDF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)
 CBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)
The following section provides information and instructions for
installing and updating the LMF software and files.
LMF Operating System Installation
Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to install the LMF operating system.
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation
Step
Action
Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.
– If the Setup screen is displayed, go to step 5.
– If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.
Click on the Start button.
Select Run.
In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.
NOTE
If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.
. . . continued on next page
3-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Preparing the LMF – continued
Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation
Step
Action
Follow the instructions displayed on the Setup screen.
* IMPORTANT
First Time Installations:
– Install U/WIN (First)
– Install Java Runtime Environment (Second)
– Install LMF Software (Third)
– Install BTS Binaries (Fourth)
– Install/Create BTS Folders (Fifth)
Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of the LMF
modifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win
over–writes these modifications.
NOTE
There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD–ROM. When prompted, choose
the load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform the Device
Images install after the WinLMF installation.
If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates.
CDMA LMF Home Directory
The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home directory
c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)
in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home
directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:
:\
Where:
 = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home
directory is located.
 = the directory path or name where the CDMA
LMF is installed
NOTE
The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default
home directory c:\wlmf when the CDMA LMF is
installed.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-11
Preparing the LMF
– continued
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the
LMF Computer
Before logging on to a BTS with the LMF to execute optimization/ATP
procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files must be obtained
from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This
requires creating versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted
floppy diskette and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the
LMF computer.
IMPORTANT
When copying CDF files, comply with the following to
prevent BTS login problems with the LMF.
– The numbers used in the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf
filenames must correspond to the locally assigned numbers
for each BTS and its controlling CBSC.
– The generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the LMF will
work with locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file
will not provide a valid optimization unless the generic file
is edited to replace default parameters (e.g., channel
numbers) with the operational parameters used locally.
The procedure in Table 3-4 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF
files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For any further information,
refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part number
68P64114A21) or the LMF Help screen..
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF
Step
Action
Login to the CBSC workstation.
Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.
Type eject –q and press .
Type mount and press .
NOTE
 Look for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.
 If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number. Use
the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.
Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd 
(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing .
Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.
. . . continued on next page
3-12
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Preparing the LMF – continued
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF
Step
Action
With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files
on the diskette by entering the following command:
unix2dos  /floppy/no_name/
(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).
NOTE
 Other versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use the
Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text
editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMF
computer is, therefore, not recommended.
 Using cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the
command string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/na_name)
Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the LMF.
When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press .
10
Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.
11
If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer.
12
Insert the diskette containing the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files into the LMF computer.
13
Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts–# folder in the  directory for each bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.
14
Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc–#.cdf and bts–#.cdf files from the
diskette to the corresponding \wlmf\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13.
Creating a Named
HyperTerminal Connection for
MMI Connection
Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FRUs
requires establishing an MMI communication session between the LMF
and the FRU. Using features of the Windows operating system, the
connection properties for an MMI session can be saved on the LMF
computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal connection. This
eliminates the need for setting up connection parameters each time an
MMI session is required to support optimization.
Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on
the Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start the
connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminal
connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-13
Preparing the LMF
– continued
NOTE
There are differences between Windows NT and Windows
98 in the menus and screens for creating a HyperTerminal
connection. In the following procedure, items applicable
to:
– Windows NT will be identified with Win NT
– Windows 98 will be identified with Win 98
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs>Accessories
Perform one of the following:
 For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal or
 For Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click
on the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.
NOTE
 If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.
(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)
 If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.
When the Connection Description box opens:
– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.
– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and
– Click OK.
NOTE
For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a
physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS–232 port to be used
for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 – Win NT – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 – Win
98), and click OK.
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
. . . continued on next page
3-14
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Preparing the LMF – continued
Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection
Step
Action
Click OK.
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File>Save
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File>Exit
Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.
10
Perform one of the following:
 If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12 or
 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories
11
Perform one of the following:
 For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.
 For Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12
Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it
(Win 98).
13
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
14
From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
15
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-15
Preparing the LMF
– continued
Folder Structure Overview
The LMF uses an  folder that contains all of the
essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The list that
follows outlines the folder structure for the LMF. Except for the bts–nnn
folders, these folders are created as part of the the LMF installation.
Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure
:\ (drive letter)
 folder
cdma folder
BTS–nnn folders (A separate folder is
required for each BTS where bts–nnn is the
unique BTS number; for example, bts–163)
loads folder
version folder (A separate folder is
required for each different version; for
example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5)
code folder
data folder
3-16
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Preparing the LMF – continued
LMF to BTS Connection
The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left
side of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access
door (see Figure 3-4).
Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection
Step
Action
To gain access to the connectors, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the Velcro tape
covering the BNC “T” connector and slide out the computer service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-4).
Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshielded
twisted–pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DC
transformer). If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B BNC connector. If there is
still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure.
NOTE
– Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet
connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC
transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.
* IMPORTANT
The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)
must not touch the chassis during optimization.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-17
Preparing the LMF
– continued
Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail
NOTE:
Open LAN CABLE ACCESS
door. Pull apart Velcro tape and
gain access to the LAN A or LAN
B LMF BNC connector.
ÁÁÁÁ
Á
LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS
ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME
(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;
ETHERNET “B” COVERED
WITH VELCRO TAPE)
ETIB
10BASET/10BASE2
CONVERTER CONNECTS
DIRECTLY TO BNC T
LMF COMPUTER
TERMINAL WITH
MOUSE
PCMCIA ETHERNET
ADPATER & ETHERNET
UTP ADAPTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11
CONNECTORS)
EBA
RFDS
115 VAC POWER
CONNECTION
SC4812ET RF CABINET
FW00168
3-18
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Preparing the LMF – continued
Pinging the Processors
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be be verified. Figure 3-5 represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.
Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN network
modules to get a response from the specified “target” module.
Follow the steps in Table 3-7 to ping each processor (on both LAN A
and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD.
Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram
OUT
50Ω
IN
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
BTS
(MASTER)
1A
4A
2A
5A
3A
6A
20 Pair
Punchblock
(RGPS)
1B 2B
4B 5B
50 Pair
Punch
Block
3B
6B
(Alarms/
Spans)
RF Expansion Ports
1A
2A
3A
1B 2B
BTS
(EXPANSION)
RGD
Board
1A
Power Input
+27V
4A
RF
GPS
2A
5A
3A
6A
1B 2B
4B 5B
50 Pair
Punch
Block
3B
6B
(Alarms/
Spans)
RF Expansion Ports
LAN
3B
20 Pair
Punchblock
(RGPS)
RGD/RGPS
Micro–
wave
CHASSIS
GROUND
1A
IN OUT
2A
3A
1B 2B
4A
5A
6A
4B 5B
Power Input
27V Ret
6B
Spans
Modem
Alams
Antenna’s
2 Sec
Remote
ASU
4A
5A
6A
4B 5B
RF
GPS
IN OUT
Power Input
27V Ret
6B
19 MHz
Spans
Modem
Alams
Antenna’s
GND
Lugs
Power Input
+27V
19 MHz
RGD/RGPS
Micro–
wave
LAN
3B
Remote
ASU
RGD
Board
2 Sec
GND
Lugs
50Ω
50Ω
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
CHASSIS
GROUND
FW00199
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-19
Preparing the LMF
– continued
IMPORTANT
The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on
each frame/enclosure before performing this test. All other
processor board LAN connections are made via the
backplanes.
Table 3-7: Pinging the Processors
Step
Action
From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
In the Open box, type ping and the GLI2 IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI2 in field BTS units.
Click on the OK button.
If the targeted module responds, text similar to the following is displayed:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
If there is no response the following is displayed:
Request timed out
If the GLI2 fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical
problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the
GLI2 itself.
3-20
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Using CDMA LMF
Basic LMF Operation
NOTE
The terms “CDMA LMF” and “WinLMF” are
interchangeable
The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating
environments which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:
 Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
 Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:
Selecting and deselecting BTS devices
Enabling devices
Disabling devices
Resetting devices
Obtaining device status
Sorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A78.
Basic LMF Command Line
Interface (CLI) Operation
Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one
handler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such that
the GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to
use the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI
automatically finds and uses an in–progress login session with a BTS
initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in
the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running when
the GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already running
when the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already
running when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the
following warning message:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure that you want to start the application?
This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the
application. Selecting no terminates the application.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-21
Using CDMA LMF
– continued
CLI Format Conventions
The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:
verb
device including device identifier parameters
switch
option parameters consisting of:
– keywords
– equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value
– parameter values
Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option
parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.
Following is an example of a CLI command.
measure bbx–– rssi channel=6 sector=5
Refer to the LMF CLI Commands, R 15.X (68P09251A59) for a
complete explanation of the CLI commands and their use.
Logging into a BTS
IMPORTANT
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file is
used for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are
provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the
correct CDF files can result in wrong results. Failure to
use the correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic
carrying) site can shut down the site.
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTS’s at a
time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.
Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF is
properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-4). Follow the procedure in
Table 3-8 to log into a BTS.
Prerequisites
Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
 The LMF is correctly installed and prepared.
 A bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.
 The LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer
was connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating
system and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after
connecting it to the BTS (see Table 3-6 and Figure 3-4).
3-22
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Using CDMA LMF – continued
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment
Table 3-8: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Start the LMF GUI environment by clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF’s not running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Click on Login tab (if not displayed).
If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMA
icon.
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address
for MGLI–2.
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normally
MPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.
10
Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)
NOTE
 If you attempt to log in to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
 There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
 If the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices can
be seen.
 If the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-23
Using CDMA LMF
– continued
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-9 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment
Table 3-9: BTS CLI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI session
will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts–
host=
port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is
first login to this BTS).
port = IP port of the TS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to
this BTS)
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the
CLI operating environments.
IMPORTANT
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and the CLI
environments at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that the login or logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-10: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop–up message will appear).
. . . continued on next page
3-24
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Table 3-10: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
Click on Yes or press the Enter key to confirm logout. You are returned to the Login tab.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the
GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system should not log out of the BTS.
When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.
If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base Station
because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.
Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click Yes in
the Logout Error popup which appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-11: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts– 
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
Command=logout bts–33
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-25
Using CDMA LMF
– continued
Establishing an MMI
Communication Session
For those procedures that require MMI communications between the
LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-12 to initiate the
communication session.
Table 3-12: Establishing MMI Communications
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires
MMI communication session.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows
desktop shortcut.
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from
the Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal>Tools>Update Next Load function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set to the correct
code version level.
Download code to the primary MGLI2 by clicking on the MGLI2.
– From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
– Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI2 should automatically be downloaded with data
and enabled.)
Download code and data to the redundant MGLI2 but do not enable at this time.
Download Code and Data to
Non–MGLI2 Devices
Non–MGLI2 devices can be downloaded individually or all equipped
devices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-14 to download code and data to the non–MGLI2 devices.
NOTE
When downloading multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). These
devices can be downloaded separately after completing the
multiple download.
3-28
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-14: Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI Devices
Step
Action
Select all devices to be downloaded.
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report displays the result of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
After the download has started, the device being downloaded changes to blue. If the download is
completed successfully, the device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).
After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with code and has changed to OOS-RAM, the
status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
To download the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:
Device>Download Data
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options.
 Local GPS
 Remote GPS
 HSO (only for source 2 & 3)
 LFR (only for source 2 & 3)
 10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)
 NONE (only for source 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT, CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Select the applicable CSM(s).
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Clock Source menu item.
Click on the Select menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the related
check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selection
action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-29
Download the BTS – continued
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).
The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. The GPS receiver
(mounted on CSM 1) is used as the primary timing reference and
synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides redundancy (but
does not have a GPS receiver).
The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN–C LFR, HSO, or external 10
MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use as a secondary timing
reference. In all cases, the CSM monitors and determines what reference
to use at a given time.
IMPORTANT
For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS
receiver “daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1
slot before continuing.
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs installed in
the C–CCP shelves.
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs
Step
Action
Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
NOTE
FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in the
Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.
CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).
* IMPORTANT
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operated
by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters satellite orbits;
therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”
that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPS
receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position fix
for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiver
needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).
. . . continued on next page
3-30
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Download the BTS – continued
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs
Step
Action
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, CSM–1 should be bright green (INS–ACT) and CSM–2 should be dark
green(INS–STB)
If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-7 and Table 3-19 to determine
the cause.
NOTE
After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green
(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”
parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 mS).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs installed in
the C–CCP shelves.
IMPORTANT
The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled,
prior to downloading and enabling the MCC.
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs
Step
Action
Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose All MCCs.
From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-31
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
Clock Synchronization
Manager System Time
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in
slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy.
The CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the
remote GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the
antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have
a daughter card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.
The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1
and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution Cards
(CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608 MHz
clocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to CSM 2. A
failure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to redundant
CSM 2 and CCD 2.
Each CSM2 board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides
19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referenced to the
selected synchronization source (see Table 3-19):
 GPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/R–GPS
 LORAN–C Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability Oscillator
(HSO)
 External reference oscillator sources
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1
board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The source
selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.
Synchronization between the primary and redundant CSM CCD pairs, as
well as the LFR or HSO back–up to GPS synchronization, increases
reliability.
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator
The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.
3-32
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has
an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame
and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and
LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-19).
HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(see Table 3-19).
NOTE
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for
60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power.
CSM board warm-up allows the oscillator oven
temperature and oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to
test. Test equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium
standard timebase to stabilize in frequency before any
measurements are made.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-33
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM
boards before performing the rf path verification tests. Parts of this
procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall
optimization has been completed.
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
Action
1a
For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM slot 1
and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.
1b
For Remote GPS (RGPS):Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC (or subsequent).
Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
board) to the MMI port on CSM–1 (see Figure 3-7).
Reinstall CSM–2.
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5)
NOTE
The LMF program must be running when a Hyperterminal session is started.
When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.
CAUTION
 Connect GPS antenna to the (GPS) RF connector
ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver
can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected
to any other RF connector.
3-34
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal Connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM board shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to connect to CSM–1 installed in
the C–CCP shelf, verifying that it is functioning normally.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-35
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.
BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the
GPS receivers.
sources
– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:
N Source Name Type
TO Good Status
Last Phase Target Phase Valid
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 LocalGPS
Primary 4
YES
Good
Yes
1 LFR CHA
Secondary 4
YES
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
2 Not Used
Current reference source number: 0
– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
No
N/A
timed–out*
Timed–out* No
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources  at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid
source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Yes
. . . continued on next page
3-36
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-37
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
3-38
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
10
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
11
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-39
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
LORAN–C
Initialization/Verification
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus  to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus 
LFR Station
St ti
St
Status:
Clock coherence: 512
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N
5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N
5990
47/55 dB –6 S/N
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N
7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N
7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N
9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N
9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N
9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N
9940W 49/56 dB –4
4 S/N
9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N
9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N
Note
> This must be greater
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag: . PLL Station .
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag
Flag:
Flag:S
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
> This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
. . . continued on next page
3-40
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources  to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
– Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
–3
Yes
LFR ch A
Secondary 4
Yes
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 1
LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
Close the hyperterminal window.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-41
Test Equipment Set–up
Connecting Test Equipment to
the BTS
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via IEEE–488/GPIB bus.
The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory set
GPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMF
and any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have
been set correctly (normally 13 for a power meter and 18 for a CDMA
analyzer).
The following test equipment is required to perform optimization,
calibration and ATP tests:
LMF
Test set
Directional coupler and attenuator
RF cables and connectors
Refer to Table 3-21 for an overview of connections for test equipment
currently supported by LMF. In addition, see the following figures:
 Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the test set connections for TX
calibration
 Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests
Supported Test Sets
Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of the
following test sets:
CyberTest
Advantest R3465 and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
Hewlett–Packard HP 8935
Hewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface (1.9 GHz)
and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
 Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional
 Rubidium Standard Timebase – optional
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test
connections must be through the 30 dB directional coupler
for an 800 MHz BTS and the 30 dB directional coupler
plus a 20 dB in-line attenuator for a 1.9 GHz BTS.
3-42
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Test Equipment Setup Chart
Table 3-21 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorola
standards.
To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently
being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.
Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to
that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),
reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.
Table 3-21: Test Equipment Setup
TEST SETS
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
Apr 2001
Cyber–
Test
Advantest
EVEN
EVEN SEC
SEC REF SYNC IN
TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
HP
8935
HP
8921A
HP
8921
W/PCS
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EXT
REF IN
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
LMF
Directional
Coupler & Pad*
SYNC
MONITOR
CDMA
CDMA
TIME BASE TIME BASE
IN
IN
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP–IB
HP–IB
HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50–OHM
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF IN/
OUT
RF OUT
50–OHM
DUPLEX
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
HP–IB
GPIB
SERIAL
PORT
20 DB
PAD
BTS
PORT
TX1–6
RX1–12
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-43
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Equipment Warm-up
IMPORTANT
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX
channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC
place the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under test
OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
Cable Calibration Setup
Figure 3-8 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported test
sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and
output ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for each
test. Table 3-25 provides a procedure for calibrating cables.
3-44
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
ANT IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
B. RX TEST SETUP
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Advantest Model R3465
RF OUT
50–OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
INPUT
50–OHM
20 DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
TX
CABLE
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
FW00089
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-45
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Setup for TX Calibration
Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Figure 3-9: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
POWER
SENSOR
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
FRONT PANEL
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
OUT
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF
IN/OUT
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
TX TEST
CABLE
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
TX
TEST
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
** BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIP SWITCH
SETTINGS**
RF IN/OUT
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
LAN
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
G MODE
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00094
3-46
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST
CANNOT BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. A
POWER METER MUST BE USED.
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
POWER METER
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
TX
TEST
CABLE
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
TX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA GROUP
OR TX RFDS DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIP SWITCH
S MODE
SETTINGS*
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
BTS
ON
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
LAN
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00095
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-47
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
Figure 3-11: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
IN
RF
IN/OUT
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
RF
OUT
NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used
with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
BTS
DUPLEX OUT
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RF IN/OUT
FREQ
MONITOR
Advantest Model R3465
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB ADRS
CSM
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
RF OUT
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
INPUT
50–OHM
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00096
3-48
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Figure 3-12: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
* FOR 1700 AND
1900 MHZ ONLY
RF
IN/OUT
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF OUT
ONLY
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
BTS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
FREQ
MONITOR
RF
IN/OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CSM
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00097
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-49
Test Set Calibration
Background
Proper test equipment setup ensures that the test equipment and
associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that
measurements are correct.
NOTE
If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been
calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not
need to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,
communications test set, additional test equipment,
associated test cables, and adapters.)
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and
adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has
been calibrated and maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,
that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been
replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
can introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
IMPORTANT
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Purpose
These procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routine
used to determine the path losses of the supported communications
analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna
switch that make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the
gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the
CDMA LMF.
3-50
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Selecting Test Equipment
Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
Prerequisites
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMF
computer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab
is used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a
network connection.
Ensure the following has been completed before selecting test
equipment:
 Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
 CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Manually Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification.
Table 3-22: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
Step
Action
From the Options menu, select LMF Options. The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box. Recommended Addresses
13=Power Meter
18=CDMA Analyzer
Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.)
NOTE
With manual selection, CDMA LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with CDMA LMF.
Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-51
Test Set Calibration – continued
Automatically Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the
CDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actually
communicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-23
to use the auto-detect feature.
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
Step
Action
From the Options menu, select LMF Options. The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).
Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
NOTE
When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to
search box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a power
meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in the
GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will be used for RF power measurements. If the
test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter is not
selected.
Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will
appear in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
3-52
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power
meter is zeroed.
Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibrate
test equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipment
must be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-24 to calibrate the test equipment.
Table 3-24: Test Equipment Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Follow
the instructions provided.
Follow the direction provided.
Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables
The cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for the
TX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is
used to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable
configuration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibration
consists of the following steps.
 Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any
measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used only
for the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of the
short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX
cable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX
cable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the
analyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements.
 The short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured. The
RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable with
type–N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX port
the test equipment.
 The short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured. The
TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type–N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of the path loss
of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is different
in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set so the TX
cable configuration consists only of the required length coax cable.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-53
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating Cables with a
CDMA Analyzer
The Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used to
calibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.
NOTE
LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an
HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer type
or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method must
be used (refer to Table 3-26 and Table 3-27). Cable
calibration values must be manually entered if the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer method is used. For the
HP8921A, refer to Appendix F.
The test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-8
illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup.
Table 3-25: Cable Calibration
Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a
comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will be
calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TX
calibration.
Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration
picklist.
Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayed
with the results of the cable calibration.
3-54
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating TX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the TX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-13 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-26: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 1840–1870 MHz band for Korea PCS and
1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-13, “A”) and record the value.
Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of the
diagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (1840–1870 MHz for Korea PCS and
1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.
Calibration factor = A – B Example:
Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use
the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-13: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION
TO THE TX PORTS DURING TX
CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX
PORTS DURING ATP TESTS.
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE
POWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATION
AND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TX
ATP TESTS.
Signal
Generator
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SECOND RF
TEST CABLE.
FW00293
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-55
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating RX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-14, if required.
Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step
Action
Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.
Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS
and 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-14, “A”) and record the value
for “A”.
Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency in the 1850–1910 MHz band. Record the value at point ‘‘B”.
Calibration factor = A – B
Example:
Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dB
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final test
setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to
ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-14: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE OUTPUT
PORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTS
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT TEST
CABLE
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
3-56
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
FW00294
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting Cable Loss Values
Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing cable calibration with use of the
applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable
loss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-28: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit >Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
 If cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
 Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-57
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value
If an in–service TX coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)
must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX
calibration and audit calculations.
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-29: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit >TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
 The In–Service Calibration check box in the Options>LMF Options>BTS Options tab must
checked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit
functions.
 Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3-58
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Introduction
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset
Calibration
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path
(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. The
BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX2.
Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and terminates at a
backplane BBX2 slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX2 backplane
slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path
(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Each
transmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX2 slot, travels
through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path
calibration is performed, the RX path BLO will automatically be set to
the default value.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.
The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated once
each year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for all
associated RF paths after replacing any of the following components or
associated interconnecting RF cabling:
Apr 2001
BBX2 board
C–CCP shelf
CIO card
CIO to LPA backplane RF cable
LPA backplane
LPA
TX filter / TX filter combiner
TX thru-port cable to the top of frame
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-59
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector you must first verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector
assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,
there is a high probability that the card/module could be
damaged by ESD.
IMPORTANT
3-60
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of
each CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated
with BBX2 boards), move BBX2 boards from shelves
currently not under test and install them into the empty
BBX2 slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that
all BBX2 TX paths are tested.
– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites
that are due for periodic optimization.
– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the
correct BBX2 slots are equipped. Edit the file as
required to include BBX2 slots not currently
equipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (BLO) data
file. After calibration has been completed, this offset data must be
downloaded to the BBX2s using the Download BLO function. An
explanation of the file is shown below.
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you
print out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the
following descriptions.
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a
slot Block).
Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX2 slots. Slot 20
contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX2 (see Table 3-31).
Each BBX2 slot header block contains:
 A creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
 The number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and
actual calibration data.
 The calibration data for a BBX2 is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, BBX2 slot, and calibration point.
– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the
contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main
receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-30: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments
Apr 2001
Range
Assignment
C[1]–C[240]
Transmit
C[241]–C[480]
Receive
C[481]–C[720]
Diversity Receive
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-61
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Three sectors are
allowed.
Table 3-31: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX2
Sectorization
TX
RX
RX Diversity
Slot[1] (Primary BBX2s 1 through 12)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
11
12
3–Sector,
1st
Carrier
3–Sector,
3rd
Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
4th
Carrier
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
Slot[20] (Redundant BBX2–13)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
11
12
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
1st
Carrier
3–Sector,
3rd
Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
4th
Carrier
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
 Refer to the hard copy of the file. As you can see, 10 calibration
points per sector are supported for each branch. Two entries are
required for each calibration point.
 The first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel
(frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all even
entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from
2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500
corresponds to +125 dBm).
3-62
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
 The 20 calibration entries for each slot/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is
repeated to fill out the 10 points.
Example:
C[1]=384,
odd cal entry
= 1 ‘‘calibration point”
C[2]=19102, even cal entry
C[3]=777,
C[4]=19086,
C[19]=777,
C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this
would be repeated for the next 8 points)
 When the BBX2 is loaded with BLO data, the cal file data for the
BBX2 is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL
file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[60]. BBX2 slot 1’s 10
calibration points are sent (C[1] – C[20]), followed by BBX2 slot 2’s
10 calibration points (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next,
followed by the RxDCal data.
 Temperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
slot.
Test Equipment Setup:
RF Path Calibration
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-32 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-32: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify the GPIB is properly connected and turned on.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900 MHz.
Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not
already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3-6.
 If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-24.
 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-63
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration is derived from the site CDF file.
For each BBX2, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList
CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX2 (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB
of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
+1.5 dB.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler
option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.
 At sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately
42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power
measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX2 TX output level
(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,
is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output
minus BBX2 output level.
 Example: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler
(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately
–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately
–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.
The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,
perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit
menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX
audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through
the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
 CSM–1,GLIs, MCCs, and BBX2s have correct code load and data
load.
 Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
 All BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
 Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to perform the TX calibration test.
3-64
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
IMPORTANT
Verify all BBX2 boards removed and repositioned have
been returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX2
boards moved since they were downloaded will have to be
downloaded again.
Table 3-33: BTS TX Path Calibration
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be calibrated.
From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
The test results will be displayed in the status report window.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibration
file data to the BBX2s. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for the
BTS and downloaded to the selected BBX2 devices.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-65
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.
 BBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
 TX calibration successfully completed
Follow the steps in Table 3-34 to download the BLO data to the BBX2s.
Table 3-34: Download BLO
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be downloaded.
From the Device menu, select Download BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
3-66
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
Click OK to close the status report window.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit procedure
measures the path gain or loss of every BBX2 transmit path at the site.
In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success or
failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.
IMPORTANT
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data
download to BBX2s must have been successfully
completed prior to performing the calibration audit.
Transmit (TX) Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX2
slots, per the steps in Table 3-35.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-67
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX2(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
CSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code load.
Primary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
All BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
Table 3-35: TX Path Audit
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be audited. From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
3-68
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
All Cal/Audit Test
The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration
and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the
appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
NOTE
If the TX calibration portion of the test passed, the BLO
data will automatically be downloaded to the BBX2(s)
before the audit portion of the test is run.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
CSM–1, GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code and data load.
Primary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-36 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Table 3-36: All Cal/Audit Test
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
3-69
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can
be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
will exist. Note the following:
 The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
WARNING
Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can
cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF.
To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of the
BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use the
Create Cal File function the edited information will be lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
 LMF is logged in to the BTS
 BBX2s are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded
Table 3-37: Create CAL File
Step
Action
Select the applicable BBX2s. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBX2s.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item. The status report window is displays the results of the action.
Click OK.
3-70
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RFDS Setup and Calibration
RFDS Description
The optional RFDS is a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) used to perform
RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS
contains the following elements:
 Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
 FWT Interface Card (FWTIC)
 Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA
RFDS Hardware Installation manual (Motorola part no. 6864113A93)
CDMA RFDS User’s Guide (Motorola part no. 6864113A37), and the
CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part no. 6864113A21).
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must
match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the
editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-38 explains how to edit
the parameter settings.
 RfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
 TsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
 MC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(9600 system RFDS only)
 Asu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
 TestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file
to verify, view, or modify data.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-71
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-38: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file (1 = GLI based
RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).
EXAMPLE:
RfdsEquip = 2
TsuEquip = 1
MC1Equip = 0
MC2Equip = 0
MC3Equip = 0
MC4Equip = 0
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’’
NOTE
The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC and
copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database is
modified for the RFDS.
Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields data will need to be downloaded
to the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).
To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window is displayed
showing status of the download. Click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
After downloading data to the GLI2 the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for
approximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED
remains green.
Status the RFDS TSU. A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC
and SUA.
* IMPORTANT
If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:
3-72
Ensure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify RFDS has power.
Verify RFDS status LED is green.
Verify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).
Status the GLI2 and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the
device is in the proper state (INS).
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The NAM (number assignment module) information needs to be
programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or
be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be
programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number
during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be
recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
Explanation of Parameters
used when Programming the
TSU NAM
Table 3-39 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-39: Definition of Parameters
Access Overload Code
Slot Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary Channel A
Primary Channel B
Secondary Channel A
Secondary Channel B
These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation
of the system.
Lock Code
Security Code
Service Level
Station Class Mark
Do NOT change.
IMSI MCC
IMSI 11 12
These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN Phone Number
Apr 2001
These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN
and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE:
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file.
The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the
TODN is the number the subscriber calls.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-73
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-40 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.
Table 3-40: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
Access Overload Code
15
Slot Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary Channel A
25
1175
Primary Channel B
25
1175
Secondary Channel A
25
1175
Secondary Channel B
25
1175
Lock Code
999
Security Code
999999
Service Level
Station Class Mark
255
IMSI 11 12
99
IMSI MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
MIN Phone Number
3-74
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Measuring Directional Coupler
Loss
Uas the following procedure to calibrate directional couplers associated
with RFDS installation. The procedure involves measuring the forward
port loss and the antenna port loss to find the directional coupler loss.
Prerequisites
 RFDS installed
Table 3-41: Measuring Directional Coupler Loss
Step
Action
Connect the test set or power meter to the BTS Coupled (forward) port of the directional coupler.
Login to the BTS.
Select the BBX.
Select Device>Key XCVR.
The BBX window appears.
In the XCVR Gain field, enter the following value: 20
Verify that the XCVR Carrier and Channel fields are correct and that the Use BLO box is checked.
Click OK.
The status report window appears. Click OK.
Observe the power reading and record the value measured at the BTS Coupled (forward) port. The
value should be between –34 and –27 dBm.
If the reading is not within these values, adjust the value in the XCVR Gain field until the value is
approximately 30 dBm.
Select the BBX.
Select Device>Dekey XCVR. The status report window appears verifying the action has passed (the
XCVR is no longer keyed up). Click OK
10
Disconnect the antenna cable from the ANT port.
11
Disconnect the test set cable from the BTS Coupled (forward) port and connect it to the ANT
(antenna) port.
12
Select the BBX.
13
Select Device>Key XCVR.
The BBX window appears.
14
In the XCVR Gain field, ensure the value entered is the same as used for the recorded value in the
forward port portion of the procedure. (Note that a value of 20 was used is step 5.)
Verify that the XCVR Carrier and Channel fields are correct and that the Use BLO box is checked.
Click OK.
15
The status report window appears. Click OK.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-75
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-41: Measuring Directional Coupler Loss
Step
Action
16
Observe the power reading and record the value measured at the ANT (antenna) port.
17
Select the BBX.
18
Select Device>Dekey XCVR. The status report window appears verifying the action has passed (the
XCVR is no longer keyed up). Click OK.
19
Take the value of the Forward test and subtract the Antenna port value
from it to get the directional coupler loss. For example:
–
–28.7
1.9
–––––––––
–30.6dBm
20
3-76
–
–31.6
– 1.2
–––––––––––
–30.4dBm
Label the directional coupler results for in–service calibration reference.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.
Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an RFDS is not
installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is
required if a RFDS is installed.
Prerequisite
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit >Antenna Map >TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-77
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered.
Prerequisite
 Logged into the BTS
IMPORTANT
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to
the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit >RFDS Configuration >TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
Click on the Add Row button to add a new antenna number. Then click in the other columns and enter
the desired data.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data
examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3-78
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX
paths. For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS XCVR is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured
by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna
directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being
used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the
power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna
directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.
For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by the
BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the
BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the
CDMA communications analyzer. The difference (offset) between the
RFDS keyed power level and power level measured at the BTS XCVR is
the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL
file.
Prerequisites
 BBX2s are is INS_TEST
 Cable calibration has been performed
 TX calibration has been performed and BLO has bee downloaded for
the BTS
 Test equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-79
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Click on the RFDS menu.
Click on the RFDS Calibration menu item
Select the appropriate direction (TX/RX) in the Direction pick list
Enter the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channels box. Separate the channel numbers with a
comma or a dash if more than one channel number is entered (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 for
through).
Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list (use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple
carriers).
Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the RX Branch pick list.
Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.
11
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–up
window.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. Test results are displayed in the status
report window.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
12
Click on the BTS tab.
13
Click on the MGLI.
14
Download the CAL file which has been updated with the RFDS offset data to the selected GLI device
by clicking on Device>Download Data from the tab menu bar and pulldown.
10
NOTE
The MGLI automatically transfers the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.
3-80
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Program TSU NAM
Follow the procedure in Table 3-45 to program the TSU NAM. The
NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,
or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
 MGLI is INS.
 TSU is powered up and has a code load.
Table 3-45: Program NAM Procedure
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Select the TSU tab.
Click on the TSU menu.
Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-39 and Table 3-40) .
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-81
Alarms Testing
Alarm Verification
The alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the
optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the
RF cabinet is receiving the appropriate alarms from the power cabinet.
The SC 4812ET is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer
defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface
to the 50–pin punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”
during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the
alarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from the
active MGLI2.
All customer alarms are routed through the 50 pair punchblock located
in the I/O compartment at the back of the frame. Testing is best
accomplished by using a specialized connector that interfaces to the
50–pair punchblock. This connector is wired so that customer return 1 (2
for the B side) is connected to every input, CDI 0 through CDI 17.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included.
 The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and
Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of
alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired
alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the Ctrl key (for
individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of selections) while
clicking on the desired levels.
 The Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.
When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to
Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms
will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is
clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.
 The Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.
New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be
displayed.
 The Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor
display.
3-82
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Alarms Testing – continued
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test
Table 3-46 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.
Table 3-46: Heat Exchanger Alarm
Step
Action
Turn circuit breaker “B” of the Heat Exchanger circuit breakers OFF. This will generate a Heat
Exchanger alarm, ensure that the LMF reports the correct alarm condition in the RF Cabinet.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #25 – “Heat Exchanger Alarm” makes contact.
Turn the circuit breaker “B” ON. Ensure that the alarm condition is now removed.
NOTE
The Heat Exchanger will go through the Start Up sequence.
Door Alarm
Table 3-47 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.
Table 3-47: Door Alarm
Step
Action
Close all doors on the power cabinet. Ensure that no alarms are reported on the LMF.
Individually open and then close each power supply cabinet door. Ensure that the LMF reports an
alarm when each door is opened.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 “Door Alarm” makes contact.
AC Fail Alarm
Table 3-48 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.
Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm
Step
Action
NOTE
The batteries should have a stable charge before performing this test.
Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet OFF. The LMF should report an alarm on an AC Fail
(Rectifier Fail, Minor Alarm & Major Alarm) condition.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #23, BTS # 21, BTS # 24 and BTS Relay # 29 “AC
Fail Alarm” makes contact respectively.
Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet ON. The AC Fail alarm should clear.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-83
Alarms Testing – continued
Minor Alarm
Table 3-49 gives instructions on testing minor alarm.
Table 3-49: Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) power switch OFF. This will generate a minor
alarm. Verify that the minor alarm LED (amber) is illuminated on the Meter Alarm Panel and the
LMF reports this minor alarm.
Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #24 “Minor Alarm” makes contact.
Turn the TCP power switch ON. The alarm condition should clear.
Rectifier Alarms
The following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiple
rectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a six rectifier
system.
Single Rectifier Failure (Three
Rectifier System)
Table 3-50 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system.
Table 3-50: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Remove a single rectifier module and place it into the unused rectifier shelf #2.
Turn the AC breaker OFF, for this 2nd shelf.
Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will illuminate two (2) RED
fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and
rectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions.
NOTE
Alarm conditions reported as BTS #24 and BTS #21, contacts respectively.
Turn the AC breaker for the 2nd shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and minor alarm conditions
clear on the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF.
Multiple Rectifier Failure
Table 3-51 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system.
3-84
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-51: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step
Action
With the rectifier module still in the unused shelf position fromTable 3-50 test procedures, turn the
AC breaker for the 1st shelf OFF.
Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will illuminate two (2)
RED fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will indicate a major alarm
(Rectifier Fail and Major Alarm). The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29, BTS #21, and BTS #24)
Turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.
Return the rectifier module to its original location. This completes the alarm test on the power cabinet.
Single Rectifier Failure
(Six Rectifier System)
Table 3-52 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a six (6) rectifier system.
Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm
Step
Action
Remove two(2) rectifier modules from shelf #2.
Turn the AC breaker OFF, for shelf #2.
Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will illuminate two (2) RED
fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and
rectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions. (BTS #24 and BTS #21)
Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and Minor Alarm conditions have
cleared.
Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six
Rectifier System)
Table 3-53 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a six (6) rectifier system.
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step
Action
Replace one rectifier module previously removed and turn the AC breaker for this shelf, OFF.
Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will illuminate a RED fail
LED, and the Meter Alarm Panel will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail, Major and Minor
Alarm).The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-85
Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step
Action
Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29)
Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.
Return all rectifier module to their original location. This completes the rectifier alarm tests on the
power cabinet.
Battery Over Temperature
Alarm (Optional)
CAUTION
Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, or
damaging battery cases when using a power heat gun.
Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-54: Battery Over Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Use a low powered heat gun and gently heat the battery over temperature sensor (see location in
Figure 3-15). Do Not hold the hot air gun closer than three (3) inches to the sensor. This will avoid
burning the cable insulation.
When the sensor is heated to approximately 50° C, a battery Over Temperature alarm is generated.
NOTE
An audible click will sound as K1 contact engage and K2 contacts disengage.
Visually inspect the K1 and K2 relays to verify state changes. The LMF should be displaying correct
alarms. (BTS #22)
Verify that the CHARGE DISABLE LED (amber) on the Meter Alarm Panel and the BATTERY
MAIN LED (green) are both illuminated.
Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contact return to normal position
(K1 open and K2 closed). Use the LMF verify that all alarms have cleared.
3-86
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Alarms Testing – continued
Figure 3-15: Battery Overtemperature Sensor
FW00408
Buss Bar
6 AWG Cables
Battery Overtemp Sensor
Negative Temperature Compensation Sensor
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-87
Alarms Testing – continued
Rectifier Over Temperature
Alarm
NOTE
This is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself,
this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at the
rear of the cabinet.
Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-55: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm
Step
Action
Remove the J8 link on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel (see Figure 3-16 for J8 location).
NOTE
This is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connector
bulkhead at the rear of the cabinet.
Verify that RECTIFIER OVERTEMP LED (red) is illuminated. Contacts on K1 and K2 change states
(K1 now closed and K2 open).
Verify that the LMF has reported an alarm condition. (BTS #26)
Reinstall J8 connector and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared. K1 and K2 should now be in
their normal states (K1 open and K2 closed).
This completes the system tests of the SC 4812ET power cabinet.
3-88
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Alarms Testing – continued
Figure 3-16: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel
FRONT VIEW
VOLT
AMP
AMPS
VOLT
–
PWR
–
TEST POINTS
TEST POINTS
OFF ON
REAR VIEW
J1
J2
YEL
VIOLENT
OR
J3
J8
J9
J4
J6
J5
Terminal Block
RED BLK OR BRWN
Terminal Block
Rear Connector Panel
J4
J5
Not
Used
J6
J1
J2
J3
FW00245
Before Leaving the site
Table 3-56 gives instructions on what to check before leaving the site.
Table 3-56: Check Before Leaving the Site
Step
Action
Verify that ALL battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are CLOSED (pushed in).
Verify that the Heat Exchanger is running.
Verify that the Meter Alarm Panel and TCP modules are switched ON.
Verify that the Battery Test Switch on the Meter Alarm Panel is in the OFF position.
Verify that no alarm conditions are being reported (with all doors closed).
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
3-89
Alarms Testing – continued
Notes
3-90
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Table of Contents
Apr 2001
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Tests Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX/RX OUT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Tx Mask Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4-5
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Rho Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-7
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4-8
TX Code Domain Power Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: Code Domain Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background: FER Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-11
Generate an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-12
4-12
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – Overview
Introduction
The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Motorola
Cellular Field Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all
equipped BTS subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility
(LMF) and supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File
(CDF) assignment.
The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a
file that can be printed. All tests are controlled via the LMF platform
using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment
supported by the LMF can be used.
This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is
the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of
simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying
commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution
of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel
the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the
progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer
to LMF CLI Commands, R15.X (68P09251A59).
IMPORTANT
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors
only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the LMF.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test
set components, if required.
Customer requirements determine which ATP tests to are to be
performed and the field engineer selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.
The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
 All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.
These include the GLI2, MCC, BBX2, and CIO cards, the LPAs and
passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter,
and RF cables.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Overview
– continued
 All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.
These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion
frames), CIO, BBX2, MCC, and GLI2 cards and the passive
components including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.
 All TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.
 Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, download BLO, and
TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.
ATP Tests Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:
 BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
 LMF is logged into the BTS
 CSMs, GLI2s, BBX2s, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)
have correct code load and data load
Primary CSM and GLI2 are INS_ACT
MCCs are INS_ACT
BBX2s are OOS-RAM
BBX2s are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded
Test cables are calibrated
Test equipment is selected
Test equipment is connected for ATP tests
Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated
GPIB is on
WARNING
Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned
OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports
are properly terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP
tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
TX/RX OUT Connections
IMPORTANT
4-2
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At
sites with RFDS, all measurements are through the RFDS
directional coupler TX OUT connector.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Overview – continued
ATP Test Procedure
There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to
completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the
following ATP testing options should be run.
Table 4-1 provides the procedure to execute an ATP test. To completely
test a BTS, run the ATP tests according to one of the following ATP
testing options.
ATP Testing Option 1
 All TX/RX test
ATP Testing Option 2
 All TX test
 All RX test
ATP Testing Option 3
TX Mask test
Rho test
Pilot Time Offset test
Code Domain Power test
FER test
NOTE
The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX
path calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.
IMPORTANT
If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,
remove the manual control/system memory card from the
card slot and set the IO CONFIG to the Talk & Listen
mode before starting the automated testing.
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual ATP tests can be used to verify the results of
specific tests:
Spectral Purity TX Mask
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform,
generated on each sector, meets the transmit spectral mask specification
with respect to the assigned CDF file values.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
4-3
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Overview
– continued
Waveform Quality (rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in
ANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and
perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents
100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot
Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).
Code Domain Power
This test verifies code domain power levels, which have been set for all
ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < –27 dB .
Frame Error Rate
The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire
CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all
respective sector/antennas. The test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all
traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at
an RF input level of –119 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC). Follow
the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
NOTE
The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Select the BBX2(s) and MCC(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select the desired test.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier – bts# – sector# – carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier
pick list.
To select multiple items, hold down the  or  key while making the selections.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the cbsc–n.cdf
file for the BTS.
Click OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
Click Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
If Dismiss is used the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
Background: Tx Mask Test
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same
command. All measurements are through the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only). BBX2 power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler).
NOTE
TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power
level to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from
pilot gain set to 541.
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution
bandwidth with respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel,
measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth, in dB, verifying that results meet
system tolerances at the following test points:
 1.9 GHz
– at least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency
– at least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency
 800 MHz:
–
–
–
–
at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequencY
at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency
at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
The BBX2 then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
4-5
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency
Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
+ 1980 kHz
– 1980 kHz
– 900 kHz
– 750 kHz
4-6
+ 900 kHz
+750 kHz
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
FW00282
DRAFT
Apr 2001
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test
Background: Rho Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up
using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier
(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX2 power output is
set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS
or RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that
result meets system tolerances Waveform quality (rho) should be > 0.912
(–0.4 dB).
The BBX2 then de-keys and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned
to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.
The LMF Tests menu list item, Rho, performs the waveform quality test
for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX
output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
4-7
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Background: Pilot Offset
Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
will be via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements from
the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using both
bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
Time Offset in uS, verifying results meet system tolerances: Pilot Time
Offset should be within < 3 µs of the target PT Offset (0 mS).
The BBX2 then de-keys, and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned
to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.
4-8
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
TX Code Domain Power Acceptance Test
Background: Code Domain
Power Test
This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX2 carrier
keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.
All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by
the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262 and all
MCC channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal
Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes, and are
assigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to
be tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32
CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made, so all channel
elements are verified on all sectors.
BBX2 power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT
connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
Code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD numbered
Walsh channels, are verified using the OCNS command. This is done by
verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels
measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
The BBX2 then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned
to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.
Upon completion of the test, OCNS is disabled on the specified
MCC/CE.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
4-9
TX Code Domain Power Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Showing all OCNS Passing
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Indicating Failures
4-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
FW00283
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test
Background: FER Test
This test verifies the BTS Frame Error Rate (FER) on all traffic channel
elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1%
FER) at an RF input level of –119 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower
Top Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set as the signal source controlled by the same command.
All measurements will be via the LMF.
The pilot gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up using
only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel
element only). BBX2 power output is set to –20 dBm as measured at the
TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
The BBX2 must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive circuitry.
The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode
and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse
link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying the
results meet the following specification: FER returned less than 1% and
total frames measured is 1500.
All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The
BBX then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned to
the current RX antenna paths under test. The test is then repeated.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
4-11
Generate an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the
results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to
close the status report window. The ATP report will not be updated if the
status reports window is closed with use of the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for
each test:
Test name
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
Follow the procedures in the Table 4-2 to view and create a printable file
for the ATP report of a BTS.
Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report
Step
Action
Click on the Login tab if it is not in the forefront.
Select the desired BTS from the Available Base Stations pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Sort the report if desired by clicking on a column heading.
Click on the Dismiss button if you do not want to create a printable file copy.
To create a printable file, select the desired file type in the picklist and then click on the Save button.
4-12
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Chapter 5: Leaving the Site
Table of Contents
Apr 2001
External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Reset All Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
LMF Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Prepare to Leave the Site
External Test Equipment
Removal
Perform the procedure outlined in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test
equipment and configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal
Step
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the rear of the frame.
CAUTION
Verify all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the
correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will
cause system degradation of call processing.
Reset All Devices
Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The CBSC
configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code
on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data
and code when the span is active again.
Updating BTS CAL LMF Files
in the CBSC
Updated CAL file information is moved from the LMF Windows
environment back to the CBSC which resides in a Unix environment.
The procedures that follow detail how to move files from the Windows
environment to the CBSC.
Copying CAL files from LMF to a Disk
Follow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a LMF
computer to a 3.5 diskette.
Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette
Step
Action
Insert a disk into your Windows A drive.
NOTE
If your disk has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The disk must be DOS formatted
before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or online helps on how to
format diskettes.
Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from your Programs menu list.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
5-1
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette
Step
Action
Click on your C: drive.
Double Click on the wlmf folder.
Double Click on the CDMA folder.
Click on the bts–# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.
Drag the BTS–#.cal file to the 3–1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the
mouse button.
Continue step 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired and close the Windows Explorer
program by selecting Close from the File menu option.
Copying CAL files from diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedures in Table 5-3 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC
Step
Action
Log into the CBSC workstation.
Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.
Enter eject –q and press the Enter key.
Enter mount and press the Enter key. Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.
NOTE
If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.
Enter ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the disk.
Enter cd and press the Enter key.
Enter pwd and press the Enter key. Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/).
Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is the BTS
number).
10
Enter ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.
11
Enter eject and press the Enter key.
12
Remove the floppy disk from the workstation.
5-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
BTS Site Span Configuration
Verification
Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2
boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be
verified.
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the
MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line
code configuration (in bold type):
span view 
Observe a display similar to the options shown below:
COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span
D – Default
D f lt (0
(0–131
131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
f t
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Oh
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
If the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct
choice, proceed to Table 5-5.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
5-3
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Figure 5-1: MGLI2/SGLI2 MMI Port Connection
RS–232 CABLE
FROM LMF COM1
PORT
GLI BOARD
NULL MODEM BOARD
(PART# 8484877P01)
9–PIN TO 9– PIN
RS–232 CABLE
MMI SERIAL PORT
REF– FW00344
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2
boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be
configured.
IMPORTANT
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span
configurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match
those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the
exact configuration data is available. Loading incorrect
span configuration data will render the site inoperable.
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the
front panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-14).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
. . . continued on next page
5-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters
to match that of the physical spans a – f run to the site:
span_config     
option#1 = the span to change (a – f)
option#2 = the span type (0 – 8):
0 – E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC–4)
1 – E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)
2 – E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC–4, TS16)
3 – E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)
4 – T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
5 – T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)
6 – J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
7 – J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
8 – T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps
option#4 = the span equalization (0 – 7):
0 – T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)
1 – T1_4 (T1,J1:393–524 feet)
2 – T1_4 (T1,J1:131–262 feet)
3 – E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)
4 – T1_4 (T1,J1:0–131 feet)
5 – T1_4 (T1,J1:524–655 feet)
6 – T1_4 (T1,J1:262–393 feet)
7 – E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)
option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 – 31)
Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120–Ohm, LAPD channel 1:
span_config a 1 64 7 1
span_config f 1 64 7 1
Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0–131 feet), LAPD channel 0:
span_config a 5 64 4 0
span_config f 5 64 4 0
* IMPORTANT
Make sure that spans a – f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be
different for each individual span.
After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/SGLI2 board MUST be reset and
re–loaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at
the site.
Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
5-5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI2
and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/SGLI2 boards.
Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans
and Integrated Frame Modem
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors which
were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-6.
Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections
Step
Action
Connect the surge protectors on the 50–pin punch block for the spans.
Ensure that the CSU is powered ON.
Verify the span status.
LMF Removal
CAUTION
DO NOT power down the CDMA LMF without
performing the procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost
data files may result, and in some cases, the CDMA LMF
may lock up.
Follow the procedures in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and
remove the terminal.
Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF
Step
Action
From the CDMA window select File>Exit.
From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows
message appears.
Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.
Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as required
for equipment transport.
5-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Reestablish OMC-R Control/
Verifying T1/E1
IMPORTANT
After all activities at the site have been completed,
including disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the
OMC-R and request the BTS be placed under control of
the OMC-R.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
5-7
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Notes
5-8
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
Apr 2001
Basic Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-6
6-7
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
6-8
6-8
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-12
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-17
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-9
6-9
Table of Contents
– continued
RFDS – Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail on a single antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
6-19
6-19
6-19
6-20
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI2,
CSM, BBX2, MCC24E, MCC8E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC24/MCC8E LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-28
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
Overview
The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
 Step
Action
If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 by
re-seating it. If this persists, install RGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A Red
LED may also indicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.
Verify that T1 is disconnected at the Channel Signaling Unit (CSU). If T1 is still
connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI2.
Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in front of the
BTS.
Verify the LMF was configured properly.
Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet
length).
Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly.
Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF side port if connected to the BTS front
LMF primary port.
Try connecting to the I/O panel (back of frame). Use Tri–Ax to BNC adapter at
the LMF port for this connection.
10
Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.
12
Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
Cannot Communicate to
Power Meter
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
 Step
6-2
Action
Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GP–IB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test
Equipment setup section of Chapter 3 for details.
Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.
Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Cannot Communicate to
Communications Analyzer
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
 Step
Action
Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable setup.
Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment
setup section for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
then power-cycle the GPIB Box and retry.
If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.
Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18
Verify the analyzer is in Talk and Listen not Control mode.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
6-3
Troubleshooting: Download
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
 Step
Action
Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.
Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
Communication to MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any
other BTS device. MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it.
If this persists, replace card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat card and try again.
If BBX2 reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
Status it.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by
selecting the device and reset.
Cannot Download DATA to
Any Device (Card)
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
 Step
6-4
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the
card. Refer to Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to the
device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it is
enabled.
The three states that devices can be displayed:
 Enabled (green, INS)
 Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
 Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
 Step
Action
Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude
data for cell site location and GPS sync.
Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.
The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled.
LPA Errors
Table 6-7: LPA Errors
 Step
Apr 2001
Action
If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers,
then connect an MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection.
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display may
provide an indication of the problem. (Call Field Support for further assistance.)
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
6-5
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
 Step
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup
section) and connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following
bands:
For 1900 MHz:
BandClass=1; FreqBand=16
For 800 MHz:
BandClass=0; FreqBand=8
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from sensor head.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry.
Verify sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm)
Power Ref signal.
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter
display will show “RES :’’
Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan.
6-6
Action
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued
Calibration Audit Failure
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
 Step
Action
Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup
section of chapter 3).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from sensor head.
Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by
pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW
(0 dBm) Power Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBX2s before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO
Re-try the audit.
Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GP–IB Box and retry.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
6-7
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
Cannot Perform Txmask
Measurement
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX2(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot
Time Offset Measurement
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
 Step
6-8
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the
CDF file.
Re–load MGLI2 data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may
indicate that the GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq.
error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz.
Press  and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an
indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to be
re-initialized.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continued
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the
CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
Cannot Perform Carrier
Measurement
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability
10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to
test set-up.
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
6-9
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi–FER Test Failure
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
 Step
Action
Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.
Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellow
LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (1 or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on
extent of failure).
Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
6-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may be
resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.
This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,
some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock/GPS
Receiver Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model AB
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit
SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly
configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to
change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS
antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board
back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or
higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of
CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.
Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM
board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error
This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in
the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132
must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to
function correctly.
CSM Kit No.
Hardware Configuration
CSM Slot No.
Reference Source Configuration
SGLN1145
With GPS Receiver
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
SGLN4132
Without GPS Receiver
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-11
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy
flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPS
and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite
should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellites
should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verify
correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
6-12
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
Introduction
The C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
C–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will
allow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:
 Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
 Allow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” ISB (Inter Shelf Bus)
connectors
The 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the master
GLI2 to all other GLI2s in the modem frame. Its basic function is to
provide clock synchronization from the master GLI2 to all other GLI2s
in the frame.
The ISB is also provides the following functions:
 span line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.
 provide MMI connection to/from the master GLI2 to cell site modem.
 provide interface between GLI2s and the AMR (for reporting BTS
alarms).
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8 pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the C–CCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI2 and also all the BBX2 traffic.
Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)
Provides a +27 Volt input for use by the power supply modules.
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. These
include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin
interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver
Power Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 Volts
to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards.
GLI2 Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the C–CCP backplane.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-13
CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routed
to the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI2 and the other GLI2, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX2 Connector
Each BBX2 connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBX2s in the C–CCP backplane.
CIO Connectors
 RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –
the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the
C–CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to
the appropriate BBX2.
 A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX2, to
the backplane, then on to the MCC24 slots.
 Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Each
output is routed from the MCC24 slot via the backplane appropriate
BBX2.
 TX RF path signal originates from the BBX2, through the backplane
to the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling
to the LPAs in the LPA shelf.
C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
The following table provides a standard procedure for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. The
table is broken down into possible problems and steps which should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
IMPORTANT
6-14
It is important to note that all steps be followed before
replacing ANY C–CCP backplane.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
Digital Control Problems
No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Step
Action
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or
opens.
Verify C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)
Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both
GLI2s)
Step
Action
Verify C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR/CBSC data base.
Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the
master GLI2 for proper connection and damage.
Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
GLI2
Apr 2001
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or
opens.
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-15
CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)
Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX2 Control in the Shelf
Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
GLI2s
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check BBX2 connectors (both board and backplane)
for damage.
Replace the BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Table 6-20: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and
backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and
cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to 1 BBX2, replace the
BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel Elements
Table 6-21: No MCC24 Channel Elements
Step
6-16
Action
Verify CEs on a co–located MCC24 (MccType=2)
If the problem seems to be limited to 1 MCC24, replace the
MCC24 with a known good MCC24.
– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
If no CEs on any MCC24:
– Verify clock reference to CIO.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
DC Power Problems
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame. Verify there are
no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the
applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and attempt to reset it.
– If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker
problem within the frame.
– If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective
module or sub–assembly within the shelf.
Apr 2001
Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame
breaker panel is functional.
Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being
routed to the C–CCP backplane by measuring the DC voltage
level on the PWR_IN cable.
– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or
breaker problem within the frame.
– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and
measure the level at the “VCC” power feed clip on the
distribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at the
power clip, inspect the clip for damage.
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power
supply module connectors.
Replace the power supply module with a known good
module.
If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, the C–CCP
backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has occurred.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-17
CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,
BBX2, or Switchboard
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify steps outlined in Table 6-22 have been performed.
Inspect the defective board/module (both board and
backplane) connector for damage.
Replace suspect board/module with known good
board/module.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane
connectors for damage in all the affected board slots.
Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting
flowchart in this manual.
6-18
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
RFDS – Fault Isolation
Introduction
The RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification and
Post-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate and
reported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through the
directional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to the
following tables.
All tests fail
Table 6-25: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail
Step
Action
Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator output
attenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzer
rf input port.
Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that the
spectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cable
insertion loss), and the approximate frequency.
Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects to
the RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.
Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.
Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.
Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check (both
board and backplane) for damage.
Replace any boards that do not show green with known good boards one at a time in the following
order. Re–test after each is replaced.
– RFDS ASU board.
– RFDS Transceiver board.
All RX and TX paths fail
If every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies with
the rf converter board or the transceiver board. Refer to the following
table for fault isolation procedures.
Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation – All RX and TX paths fail
Step
Action
Visually check the master RF converter board (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the RF converter board with a known good RF converter board.
Visually check RXCVR TSU (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the TSU with a known good TSU.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-19
RFDS – Fault Isolation – continued
All tests fail on a single
antenna
If all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,
make the following checks.
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path
Step
Action
Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antenna
port.
Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on the
RFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.
Visually check ASU connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the ASU with a known good ASU.
Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.
NOTE
Externally route the cable to bypass suspect segment.
6-20
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for
All Modules (except GLI2,
CSM, BBX2, MCC24E, MCC8E)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
 Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status
Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
 Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-21
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
CSM LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
 Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
 Solid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
 Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
 Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
 Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or
INS_ACT in DUMB mode.
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
Off – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
Solid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
. . . continued on next page
6-22
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232
MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development
or factory environment, but may be used in the field for
debug/maintenance purposes.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-23
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 LED Status
Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-2.
The indicators and controls consist of:
 Four LEDs
 One pushbutton
ACTIVE LED
Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER LED
 Solid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
 Off – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM LED
 Solid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
 Off – No Alarm.
STATUS LED
 Flashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
 On – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
 Off – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS LED
 Solid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
 Solid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
6-24
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 Pushbuttons and
Connectors
RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a
partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. GLI2 will be
placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be
used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be
used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators
LED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
RESET
All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing
the switch.
ALARM
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
SPANS
OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN - operating normally
YELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
MASTER
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the
top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in
the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
ON - operating normally in active card
OFF - operating normally in standby card
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON - active card operating normally
OFF - standby card operating normally
MMI
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
MASTER
MASTER LED
STATUS
SPANS
SPANS LED
ALARM
ALARM LED
RESET
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
STATUS
STATUS LED
OPERATING STATUS
FW00225
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-25
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
BBX2 LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
Solid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
Solid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
MCC24/MCC8E LED Status
Combinations
The MCC24/MCC8E module has LED indicators and connectors as
described below. See Figure 6-3. Note that the figure does not show the
connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
 RED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
Off – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
Rapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
 Solid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
 The RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
 The RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
. . . continued on next page
6-26
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LED
COLOR
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup and during failure
ąconditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE
RED
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded but
ąnot enabled
SLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloaded
ON - card is codeĆloaded and enabled
ą(INS_ACTIVE)
ON - fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHI
ąbus inactive on powerĆup
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status
Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMI
connector on the ETIB module. Interpret this LED as follows:
 GREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
 Flashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
 Flashing RED — LPA is in alarm.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
6-27
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
Span Problems
(No Control Link)
Table 6-28: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the span settings using the span_view command
on the active master GLI2 MMI port. If these are set
correctly, verify the edlc parameters using the show
command. Any alarms conditions indicate that the span is
not operating correctly.
– Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel
back to the Mobility Manager (MM) and verify that
the looped signal is good.
– Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from
Base Site and MM.
6-28
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
A
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix Content
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for
6–Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMR Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-12
A-14
A-14
A-15
A-15
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
A-16
A-17
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
Verification of Test Equipment
Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer
Model
Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-1
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
Deliveries
Per established procedures
Floor Plan
Verified
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Factory Data:
BBX2
Test Panel
RFDS
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Site Temperature
Dress Covers/Brackets
Comments
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK
Parameter
Specification
Shelf ID Dip Switches
Per site equipage
Ethernet LAN verification
Verified per procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Pre–Power and Initial Power
Tests
Table A3a: Pre–power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Pre–power–up tests
Specification
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications
Internal Cables:
ISB (all cages)
CSM (all cages)
Power (all cages)
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
Ethernet Boots
Air Impedance Cage (single cage)
installed
Initial power–up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications:
Comments
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-3
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
General Optimization
Checklist
Table A3b: Pre–power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
LEDs
Frame fans
illuminated
operational
LMF to BTS Connection
Preparing the LMF
Log into the LMF PC
Create site specific BTS directory
Download device loads
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
per procedure
per procedure
Download/Enable MGLI2s
Download/Enable GLI2s
Set Site Span Configuration
Download CSMs
Enable CSMs
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCCs*
Download BBXs*
Download TSU (in RFDS)
Program TSU NAM
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
Test Set Calibration
per procedure
Comments
*MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s or MCC–1Xs. BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX1Xs
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
Initial Position Accuracy:
Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in
msec and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-5
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
LFR Receiver Operation
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
Station call letters M X Y Z
assignment.
SN ratio is > 8 dB
LFR Task State: 1fr
locked to station xxxx
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
as specified in site
documentation
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter
OK
Comments
CARRIER
LPA
Specification
4:1 & 2:1
3–Sector
2:1
6–Sector
Dual BP
3–Sector
Dual BP
6–Sector
1A
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1B
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1C
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1D
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
2A
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2B
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2C
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2D
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
3A
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3B
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3C
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3D
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
4A
C4
C2
No Alarms
4B
C4
C2
No Alarms
4C
C4
C2
No Alarms
4D
C4
C2
No Alarms
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-7
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
TX Bay Level Offset / Power
Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–7, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–10, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–11, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–12, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
. . . continued on next page
A-8
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–7, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–10, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–11, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–12, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-9
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
2–Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–7, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–7, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
3–Carrier Adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Adjacent Channels
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–7, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX2–10, ANT–4 =
BBX2–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–11, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–12, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before
calibration
TX Bay Level Offset =37 dB before
calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before
calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before
calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-11
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–7, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX2–10, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–11, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–12, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-12
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
TX Bay Level Offset / Power
Output Verification for
6–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX2–7, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–10, ANT–4 =
BBX2–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–11, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–12, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-13
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–2, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–4, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–5, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–6, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX2–7, ANT–1 =
BBX2–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX2–8, ANT–2 =
BBX2–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX2–9, ANT–3 =
BBX2–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX2–10, ANT–4 =
BBX2–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX2–11, ANT–5 =
BBX2–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX2–12, ANT–6 =
BBX2–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-14
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-15
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Alarm Verification
Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK
Parameter
Verify CDI alarm input
operation per Table 3-1.
Specification
Data
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-16
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List
Date
Site
C–CCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
C–CCP Shelf
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fans 1–3
GLI2–1
GLI2–2
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
BBX2–4
BBX2–5
BBX2–6
BBX2–7
BBX2–8
BBX2–9
BBX2–10
BBX2–11
BBX2–12
BBX2–r
MCC24/MCC8E–1
MCC24/MCC8E–2
MCC24/MCC8E–3
MCC24/MCC8E–4
MCC24/MCC8E–5
MCC24/MCC8E–6
MCC24/MCC8E–7
MCC24/MCC8E–8
MCC24/MCC8E–9
MCC24/MCC8E–10
MCC24/MCC8E–11
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
A-17
A
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List – continued
MCC24/MCC8E–12
CIO
SWITCH
PS–1
PS–2
PS–3
LPAs
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 2A
LPA 2B
LPA 2C
LPA 2D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
LPA 4A
LPA 4B
LPA 4C
LPA 4D
A-18
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix Content
Apr 2001
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
IMPORTANT
Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in
the tables below must be performed anytime a RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
BTS Frame
Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS
Item Replaced
Optimize:
C–CCP Shelf
All sector TX and RX paths to all
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
(C–CCP) shelves.
Multicoupler/
Preselector Card
The three or six affected sector RX paths for
the C–CCP shelf in the BTS frames.
Preselector I/O
All sector RX paths.
BBX2 board
RX and TX paths of the affected C–CCP
shelf / BBX2 board.
CIO Card
All RX and TX paths of the affected
CDMA carrier.
Any LPA Module
The affected sector TX path.
LPA Backplane
The affected sector TX path.
LPA Filter
The affected sector TX path.
Ancillary Frame
Item Replaced
Optimize:
Directional Coupler
All affected sector RX and TX paths to all
BTS frame shelves.
Site filter
All affected RX sector paths in all shelves
in all BTS frames.
Any RFDS component
or TSU.
The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths
(MONFWD/GENFWD).
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
B-1
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
Inter-frame Cabling
Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling
between BTS frames.
Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling
Item Replaced
Optimize:
Ancillary frame to BTS
frame (RX) cables
The affected sector/antenna RX
paths.
BTS frame to ancillary frame
(TX) cables
The affected sector/antenna TX paths.
Detailed Optimization/ATP
Test Matrix
Table B-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
IMPORTANT
Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line
is indicated in Table B-3. It is meant to be used as a
guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar
enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to
understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and
BTS site preparation will be required before performing the
Table # procedures referenced.
Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional
couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration
audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX
path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be
repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is
warranted.
Whenever any C–CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that
only power to the C–CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the
breaker supplying that shelf.
Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumed
that the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the Preselector
I/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were a
new installation.
B-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
NOTE
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow
paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX
calibration audit command.
When the CIO is replaced, the C–CCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX2 boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their
original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
B-3
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
Table 3-6/
Table 3-8
Table 3-13/
Table 3-14
Table 3-16
LPA Backplane
LPA Combiner Filter 4:1
LPA Combiner Filter 2:1
SWITCH CARD
GPS
Power Converters (See Note)
LFR/HSO
LPA Filter Bandpass
CSM
GLI2
MCC24/MCC8E
LPA
BBX2
C–CCP Backplane
CIO
Initial Power-up
TX Cables
Table 2-5
Multicoupler/Preselector
Table 2-1
Initial Boards/Modules
Install, Preliminary
Operations, CDF Site
Equipage; etc.
RX Cables
Description
RX Filter
Doc
Tbl
Directional Coupler (TX)
Directional Coupler (RX)
Table B-3: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
Start LMF
Download Code
Enable CSMs
Table 3-19
GPS Initialization /
Verification
Table 3-20
LFR Initialization /
Verification
Table 3-33
TX Path Calibration
Table 3-34
Download Offsets to BBX2
Table 3-35
TX Path Calibration Audit
Table 4–1
Spectral Purity TX Mask
Table 4–1
Waveform Quality (rho)
Table 4–1
Pilot Time Offset
Table 4–1
Code Domain Power /
Noise Floor
Table 4–1
FER Test
NOTE
Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C–CCP shelf is not lost. If power to the shelf
is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
B-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Appendix Content
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
C-1
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Usage & Background
Table C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX2 Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant
RF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the
table. The table assumes that the BBX2 Bay Level Offset (BLO) values
have been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX2 keyed up to produce a CDMA
carrier with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled).
Pilot gain is set to 262. In this case, the BBX2 Gain Set Point is shown
to correlate exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44
dBm output range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm
Gain
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
541
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
533
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
525
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
517
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
509
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
501
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
493
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
485
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
477
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
469
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
461
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
453
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
445
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
437
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
429
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
421
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
413
–
–
–
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
405
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
397
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
389
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
C-1
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continued
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm
Gain
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
381
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
374
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
366
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
358
–
–
–
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
350
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
342
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
334
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
35.1
326
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
318
–
–
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
310
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
302
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
294
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
286
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
35.8
34.8
33.8
278
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
33.5
270
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
34.3
33.3
262
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
254
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
33.7
32.7
246
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
35.4
34.4
33.4
32.4
238
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
230
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
33.9
32.9
31.9
222
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
35.6
34.6
33.6
32.6
31.6
214
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
31.2
C-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
Appendix Content
Apr 2001
1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
PCS Bands
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX2 synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the
transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for
each BBX2.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1851.25 1931.25
CHANNEL
25
275
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1863.75
1943.75
1871.25
1951.25
1883.75
1963.75
1896.25
1976.25
1908.75
1988.75
425
675
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
925
1175
Apr 2001
FW00463
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
D-1
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Calculating 1900 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
 TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz
 RX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
25
0019
50
0032
75
004B
100
0064
125
007D
150
0096
175
00AF
200
00C8
225
00E1
250
00FA
275
0113
300
012C
325
0145
350
015E
375
0177
400
0190
425
01A9
450
01C2
475
01DB
500
01F4
525
020D
550
0226
575
023F
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1931.25
1932.50
1933.75
1935.00
1936.25
1937.50
1938.75
1940.00
1941.25
1942.50
1943.75
1945.00
1946.25
1947.50
1948.75
1950.00
1951.25
1952.50
1953.75
1955.00
1956.25
1957.50
1958.75
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1851.25
1852.50
1853.75
1855.00
1856.25
1857.50
1858.75
1860.00
1861.25
1862.50
1863.75
1865.00
1866.25
1867.50
1868.75
1870.00
1871.25
1872.50
1873.75
1875.00
1876.25
1877.50
1878.75
. . . continued on next page
D-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
600
0258
625
0271
650
028A
675
02A3
700
02BC
725
02D5
750
02EE
775
0307
800
0320
825
0339
850
0352
875
036B
900
0384
925
039D
950
03B6
975
03CF
1000
03E8
1025
0401
1050
041A
1075
0433
1100
044C
1125
0465
1150
047E
1175
0497
Apr 2001
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1960.00
1961.25
1962.50
1963.75
1965.00
1966.25
1967.50
1968.75
1970.00
1971.25
1972.50
1973.75
1975.00
1976.25
1977.50
1978.75
1980.00
1981.25
1982.50
1983.75
1985.00
1986.25
1987.50
1988.75
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1880.00
1881.25
1882.50
1883.75
1885.00
1886.25
1887.50
1888.75
1890.00
1891.25
1892.50
1893.75
1895.00
1896.25
1897.50
1898.75
1900.00
1901.25
1902.50
1903.75
1905.00
1906.25
1807.50
1908.75
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
D-3
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
893.970
848.970
799
891.480
891.510
846.480
846.510
694
689
777
889.980
890.010
844.980
845.010
666
667
644
356
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
739
879.990
880.020
834.990
835.020
333
334
311
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
716
717
870.000
870.030
825.000
825.030
824.040
CHANNEL
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ËËË
ËËË
ËËË ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ËË
1023
869.040
RX FREQ
(MHz)
1013
TX FREQ
(MHz)
991
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
 Channels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
 Channels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
 RX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
D-4
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
825.0300
0001
870.0300
25
0019
870.7500
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
825.7500
. . . continued on next page
DRAFT
Apr 2001
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
50
0032
871.5000
826.5000
75
004B
872.2500
827.2500
100
0064
873.0000
828.0000
125
007D
873.7500
828.7500
150
0096
874.5000
829.5000
175
00AF
875.2500
830.2500
200
00C8
876.0000
831.0000
225
00E1
876.7500
831.7500
250
00FA
877.5000
832.5000
275
0113
878.2500
833.2500
300
012C
879.0000
834.0000
325
0145
879.7500
834.7500
350
015E
880.5000
835.5000
375
0177
881.2500
836.2500
400
0190
882.0000
837.0000
425
01A9
882.7500
837.7500
450
01C2
883.5000
838.5000
475
01DB
884.2500
839.2500
500
01F4
885.0000
840.0000
525
020D
885.7500
840.7500
550
0226
886.5000
841.5000
575
023F
887.2500
842.2500
600
0258
888.0000
843.0000
625
0271
888.7500
843.7500
650
028A
889.5000
844.5000
675
02A3
890.2500
845.2500
700
02BC
891.0000
846.0000
725
02D5
891.7500
846.7500
750
02EE
892.5000
847.5000
775
0307
893.2500
848.2500
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013
03F5
869.7000
824.7000
NOTE
1023
Apr 2001
03FF
870.0000
825.0000
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
D-5
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Notes
D-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix Content
PN Offset Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
PN Offset Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information
PN Offset Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBX2s, where the
corresponding I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table E-1.
PN Offset Usage
There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important to
determine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTS
functionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file
FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with
“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for the
processing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of
mobile meeting IS–97 specifications.
Observe the following guidelines:
 If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), the
FineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 table
MUST be used.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
 If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdj
has been set for the 13 chip table.
IMPORTANT
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL
or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If
necessary, convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimal
before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
E-1
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
– If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values from
the 13 chip delay table.
– If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offset
problem, (any mobile meeting the IS–97 specification), use the 14
chip delay table.
IMPORTANT
If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrong
FineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur.
This will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared”
over several Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh code
that it was assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidence
of smearing is usually identified by Walsh channels not at
correct levels or present when not selected in the Code
Domain Power Test.
. . . continued on next page
E-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17523
32292
4700
14406
14899
17025
14745
2783
5832
12407
31295
7581
18523
29920
25184
26282
30623
15540
23026
20019
4050
1557
30262
18000
20056
12143
17437
17438
5102
9302
17154
5198
4606
24804
17180
10507
10157
23850
31425
4075
10030
16984
14225
26519
27775
30100
7922
14199
17637
23081
5099
23459
32589
17398
26333
4011
2256
18651
1094
21202
13841
31767
18890
30999
22420
20168
12354
11187
11834
10395
28035
27399
22087
2077
13758
11778
3543
7184
2362
25840
12177
10402
1917
17708
10630
6812
14350
10999
25003
2652
19898
2010
25936
28531
11952
31947
25589
11345
28198
13947
8462
9595
4473
7E24
125C
3846
3A33
4281
3999
0ADF
16C8
3077
7A3F
1D9D
485B
74E0
6260
66AA
779F
3CB4
59F2
4E33
0FD2
0615
7636
4650
4E58
2F6F
441D
441E
13EE
2456
4302
144E
11FE
60E4
431C
290B
27AD
5D2A
7AC1
0FEB
272E
4258
3791
6797
6C7F
7594
1EF2
3777
44E5
5A29
13EB
5BA3
7F4D
43F6
66DD
0FAB
08D0
48DB
0446
52D2
3611
7C17
49CA
7917
5794
4EC8
3042
2BB3
2E3A
289B
6D83
6B07
5647
081D
35BE
2E02
0DD7
1C10
093A
64F0
2F91
28A2
077D
452C
2986
1A9C
380E
2AF7
61AB
0A5C
4DBA
07DA
6550
6F73
2EB0
7CCB
63F5
2C51
6E26
367B
210E
257B
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29673
16146
2350
7203
19657
28816
19740
21695
2916
18923
27855
24350
30205
14960
12592
13141
27167
7770
11513
30409
2025
21210
15131
9000
10028
18023
29662
8719
2551
4651
8577
2599
2303
12402
8590
17749
16902
11925
27824
22053
5015
8492
18968
25115
26607
15050
3961
19051
29602
31940
22565
25581
29082
8699
32082
18921
1128
27217
547
10601
21812
28727
9445
29367
11210
10084
6177
23525
5917
23153
30973
31679
25887
18994
6879
5889
18647
3592
1181
12920
23028
5201
19842
8854
5315
3406
7175
23367
32489
1326
9949
1005
12968
31109
5976
28761
32710
22548
14099
21761
4231
23681
73E9
3F12
092E
1C23
4CC9
7090
4D1C
54BF
0B64
49EB
6CCF
5F1E
75FD
3A70
3130
3355
6A1F
1E5A
2CF9
76C9
07E9
52DA
3B1B
2328
272C
4667
73DE
220F
09F7
122B
2181
0A27
08FF
3072
218E
4555
4206
2E95
6CB0
5625
1397
212C
4A18
621B
67EF
3ACA
0F79
4A6B
73A2
7CC4
5825
63ED
719A
21FB
7D52
49E9
0468
6A51
0223
2969
5534
7037
24E5
72B7
2BCA
2764
1821
5BE5
171D
5A71
78FD
7BBF
651F
4A32
1ADF
1701
48D7
0E08
049D
3278
59F4
1451
4D82
2296
14C3
0D4E
1C07
5B47
7EE9
052E
26DD
03ED
32A8
7985
1758
7059
7FC6
5814
3713
5501
1087
5C81
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
4096
9167
22417
966
14189
29150
18245
1716
11915
20981
24694
11865
6385
27896
25240
30877
30618
26373
314
17518
21927
2245
18105
8792
21440
15493
26677
11299
12081
23833
20281
10676
16981
31964
26913
14080
23842
27197
22933
30220
12443
19854
14842
15006
702
21373
23874
3468
31323
29266
16554
4096
1571
7484
6319
2447
24441
27351
23613
29008
5643
28085
18200
21138
21937
25222
109
6028
22034
15069
4671
30434
11615
19838
14713
241
24083
7621
19144
1047
26152
22402
21255
30179
7408
115
1591
1006
32263
1332
12636
4099
386
29231
25711
10913
8132
20844
13150
18184
19066
29963
1000
23CF
5791
03C6
376D
71DE
4745
06B4
2E8B
51F5
6076
2E59
18F1
6CF8
6298
789D
779A
6705
013A
446E
55A7
08C5
46B9
2258
53C0
3C85
6835
2C23
2F31
5D19
4F39
29B4
4255
7CDC
6921
3700
5D22
6A3D
5995
760C
309B
4D8E
39FA
3A9E
02BE
537D
5D42
0D8C
7A5B
7252
40AA
1000
0623
1D3C
18AF
098F
5F79
6AD7
5C3D
7150
160B
6DB5
4718
5292
55B1
6286
006D
178C
5612
3ADD
123F
76E2
2D5F
4D7E
3979
00F1
5E13
1DC5
4AC8
0417
6628
5782
5307
75E3
1CF0
0073
0637
03EE
7E07
0534
315C
1003
0182
722F
646F
2AA1
1FC4
516C
335E
4708
4A7A
750B
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
E-3
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
32743
7114
7699
19339
28212
29587
19715
14901
20160
22249
26582
7153
15127
15274
23149
16340
27052
13519
10620
15978
27966
12479
1536
3199
4549
17888
13117
7506
27626
31109
29755
26711
20397
18608
7391
23168
23466
15932
25798
28134
28024
6335
21508
26338
17186
22462
3908
25390
27891
9620
4670
14672
29415
20610
6479
10957
18426
22726
5247
29953
5796
16829
4528
5415
10294
17046
7846
10762
13814
16854
795
9774
24291
3172
2229
21283
16905
7062
7532
25575
14244
28053
30408
5094
16222
7159
174
25530
2320
23113
23985
2604
1826
30853
15699
2589
25000
18163
12555
8670
7FE7
1BCA
1E13
4B8B
6E34
7393
4D03
3A35
4EC0
56E9
67D6
1BF1
3B17
3BAA
5A6D
3FD4
69AC
34CF
297C
3E6A
6D3E
30BF
0600
0C7F
11C5
45E0
333D
1D52
6BEA
7985
743B
6857
4FAD
48B0
1CDF
5A80
5BAA
3E3C
64C6
6DE6
6D78
18BF
5404
66E2
4322
57BE
0F44
632E
6CF3
2594
123E
3950
72E7
5082
194F
2ACD
47FA
58C6
147F
7501
16A4
41BD
11B0
1527
2836
4296
1EA6
2A0A
35F6
41D6
031B
262E
5EE3
0C64
08B5
5323
4209
1B96
1D6C
63E7
37A4
6D95
76C8
13E6
3F5E
1BF7
00AE
63BA
0910
5A49
5DB1
0A2C
0722
7885
3D53
0A1D
61A8
46F3
310B
21DE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
28195
3557
24281
29717
14106
26649
30545
19658
10080
31396
13291
23592
19547
7637
31974
8170
13526
19383
5310
7989
13983
18831
768
22511
22834
8944
18510
3753
13813
27922
27597
26107
30214
9304
24511
11584
11733
7966
12899
14067
14012
23951
10754
13169
8593
11231
1954
12695
26537
4810
2335
7336
30543
10305
17051
23386
9213
11363
17411
29884
2898
28386
2264
17583
5147
8523
3923
5381
6907
8427
20401
4887
24909
1586
19046
26541
28472
3531
3766
32719
7122
30966
15204
2547
8111
17351
87
12765
1160
25368
24804
1302
913
29310
20629
19250
12500
27973
22201
4335
6E23
0DE5
5ED9
7415
371A
6819
7751
4CCA
2760
7AA4
33EB
5C28
4C5B
1DD5
7CE6
1FEA
34D6
4BB7
14BE
1F35
369F
498F
0300
57EF
5932
22F0
484E
0EA9
35F5
6D12
6BCD
65FB
7606
2458
5FBF
2D40
2DD5
1F1E
3263
36F3
36BC
5D8F
2A02
3371
2191
2BDF
07A2
3197
67A9
12CA
091F
1CA8
774F
2841
429B
5B5A
23FD
2C63
4403
74BC
0B52
6EE2
08D8
44AF
141B
214B
0F53
1505
1AFB
20EB
4FB1
1317
614D
0632
4A66
67AD
6F38
0DCB
0EB6
7FCF
1BD2
78F6
3B64
09F3
1FAF
43C7
0057
31DD
0488
6318
60E4
0516
0391
727E
5095
4B32
30D4
6D45
56B9
10EF
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
22575
31456
8148
19043
25438
10938
2311
7392
30714
180
8948
16432
9622
7524
1443
1810
6941
3238
8141
10408
18826
22705
3879
21359
30853
18078
15910
20989
28810
30759
18899
7739
6279
9968
8571
4143
19637
11867
7374
10423
9984
7445
4133
22646
15466
2164
16380
15008
31755
31636
6605
29417
22993
27657
5468
8821
20773
4920
5756
28088
740
23397
19492
26451
30666
15088
26131
15969
24101
12762
19997
22971
12560
31213
18780
16353
12055
30396
24388
1555
13316
31073
6187
21644
9289
4624
467
18133
1532
1457
9197
13451
25785
4087
31190
8383
12995
27438
9297
1676
582F
7AE0
1FD4
4A63
635E
2ABA
0907
1CE0
77FA
00B4
22F4
4030
2596
1D64
05A3
0712
1B1D
0CA6
1FCD
28A8
498A
58B1
0F27
536F
7885
469E
3E26
51FD
708A
7827
49D3
1E3B
1887
26F0
217B
102F
4CB5
2E5B
1CCE
28B7
2700
1D15
1025
5876
3C6A
0874
3FFC
3AA0
7C0B
7B94
19CD
72E9
59D1
6C09
155C
2275
5125
1338
167C
6DB8
02E4
5B65
4C24
6753
77CA
3AF0
6613
3E61
5E25
31DA
4E1D
59BB
3110
79ED
495C
3FE1
2F17
76BC
5F44
0613
3404
7961
182B
548C
2449
1210
01D3
46D5
05FC
05B1
23ED
348B
64B9
0FF7
79D6
20BF
32C3
6B2E
2451
068C
. . . continued on next page
E-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6491
16876
17034
32405
27417
8382
5624
1424
13034
15682
27101
8521
30232
6429
27116
4238
5128
14846
13024
10625
31724
13811
24915
1213
2290
31551
12088
7722
27312
23130
594
25804
31013
32585
3077
17231
31554
8764
15375
13428
17658
13475
22095
24805
4307
23292
1377
28654
6350
16770
1290
4407
1163
12215
7253
8978
25547
3130
31406
6222
20340
25094
23380
10926
22821
31634
4403
689
27045
27557
16307
22338
27550
22096
23136
12199
1213
936
6272
32446
13555
8789
24821
21068
31891
5321
551
12115
4902
1991
14404
17982
19566
2970
23055
15158
29094
653
19155
23588
195B
41EC
428A
7E95
6B19
20BE
15F8
0590
32EA
3D42
69DD
2149
7618
191D
69EC
108E
1408
39FE
32E0
2981
7BEC
35F3
6153
04BD
08F2
7B3F
2F38
1E2A
6AB0
5A5A
0252
64CC
7925
7F49
0C05
434F
7B42
223C
3C0F
3474
44FA
34A3
564F
60E5
10D3
5AFC
0561
6FEE
18CE
4182
050A
1137
048B
2FB7
1C55
2312
63CB
0C3A
7AAE
184E
4F74
6206
5B54
2AAE
5925
7B92
1133
02B1
69A5
6BA5
3FB3
5742
6B9E
5650
5A60
2FA7
04BD
03A8
1880
7EBE
34F3
2255
60F5
524C
7C93
14C9
0227
2F53
1326
07C7
3844
463E
4C6E
0B9A
5A0F
3B36
71A6
028D
4AD3
5C24
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23933
8438
8517
28314
25692
4191
2812
712
6517
7841
25918
16756
15116
23902
13558
2119
2564
7423
6512
17680
15862
19241
24953
21390
1145
27727
6044
3861
13656
11565
297
12902
27970
28276
22482
28791
15777
4382
20439
6714
8829
19329
31479
24994
22969
11646
21344
14327
3175
8385
645
18087
19577
23015
16406
4489
32729
1565
15703
3111
10170
12547
11690
5463
25262
15817
18085
20324
31470
31726
20965
11169
13775
11048
11568
23023
19554
468
3136
16223
21573
24342
32326
10534
28789
17496
20271
22933
2451
19935
7202
8991
9783
1485
25403
7579
14547
20346
27477
11794
5D7D
20F6
2145
6E9A
645C
105F
0AFC
02C8
1975
1EA1
653E
4174
3B0C
5D5E
34F6
0847
0A04
1CFF
1970
4510
3DF6
4B29
6179
538E
0479
6C4F
179C
0F15
3558
2D2D
0129
3266
6D42
6E74
57D2
7077
3DA1
111E
4FD7
1A3A
227D
4B81
7AF7
61A2
59B9
2D7E
5360
37F7
0C67
20C1
0285
46A7
4C79
59E7
4016
1189
7FD9
061D
3D57
0C27
27BA
3103
2DAA
1557
62AE
3DC9
46A5
4F64
7AEE
7BEE
51E5
2BA1
35CF
2B28
2D30
59EF
4C62
01D4
0C40
3F5F
5445
5F16
7E46
2926
7075
4458
4F2F
5995
0993
4DDF
1C22
231F
2637
05CD
633B
1D9B
38D3
4F7A
6B55
2E12
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
25414
7102
20516
19495
17182
11572
25570
6322
8009
26708
6237
32520
31627
3532
24090
20262
18238
2033
25566
25144
29679
5064
27623
13000
31373
13096
26395
15487
29245
26729
12568
24665
8923
19634
29141
73
26482
6397
29818
8153
302
28136
29125
8625
26671
6424
12893
18502
7765
25483
12596
19975
20026
8958
19143
17142
19670
30191
5822
22076
606
9741
9116
12705
17502
18952
15502
17819
4370
31955
30569
7350
26356
32189
1601
19537
25667
4415
2303
16362
28620
6736
2777
24331
9042
107
4779
13065
30421
20210
5651
31017
30719
23104
7799
17865
26951
25073
32381
16581
6346
1BBE
5024
4C27
431E
2D34
63E2
18B2
1F49
6854
185D
7F08
7B8B
0DCC
5E1A
4F26
473E
07F1
63DE
6238
73EF
13C8
6BE7
32C8
7A8D
3328
671B
3C7F
723D
6869
3118
6059
22DB
4CB2
71D5
0049
6772
18FD
747A
1FD9
012E
6DE8
71C5
21B1
682F
1918
325D
4846
1E55
638B
3134
4E07
4E3A
22FE
4AC7
42F6
4CD6
75EF
16BE
563C
025E
260D
239C
31A1
445E
4A08
3C8E
459B
1112
7CD3
7769
1CB6
66F4
7DBD
0641
4C51
6443
113F
08FF
3FEA
6FCC
1A50
0AD9
5F0B
2352
006B
12AB
3309
76D5
4EF2
1613
7929
77FF
5A40
1E77
45C9
6947
61F1
7E7D
40C5
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
E-5
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14726
25685
21356
12149
28966
22898
1713
30010
2365
27179
29740
5665
23671
1680
25861
25712
19245
26887
30897
11496
1278
31555
29171
20472
5816
30270
22188
6182
32333
14046
15873
19843
29367
13352
22977
31691
10637
25454
18610
6368
7887
7730
23476
889
21141
20520
21669
15967
21639
31120
10878
31060
30875
11496
24545
9586
20984
30389
7298
18934
23137
24597
23301
7764
14518
21634
11546
26454
15938
9050
3103
758
16528
20375
10208
17698
8405
28634
1951
20344
26696
3355
11975
31942
9737
9638
30643
13230
22185
2055
8767
15852
16125
6074
31245
15880
20371
8666
816
22309
3986
6455
536C
2F75
7126
5972
06B1
753A
093D
6A2B
742C
1621
5C77
0690
6505
6470
4B2D
6907
78B1
2CE8
04FE
7B43
71F3
4FF8
16B8
763E
56AC
1826
7E4D
36DE
3E01
4D83
72B7
3428
59C1
7BCB
298D
636E
48B2
18E0
1ECF
1E32
5BB4
0379
5295
5028
54A5
3E5F
5487
7990
2A7E
7954
789B
2CE8
5FE1
2572
51F8
76B5
1C82
49F6
5A61
6015
5B05
1E54
38B6
5482
2D1A
6756
3E42
235A
0C1F
02F6
4090
4F97
27E0
4522
20D5
6FDA
079F
4F78
6848
0D1B
2EC7
7CC6
2609
25A6
77B3
33AE
56A9
0807
223F
3DEC
3EFD
17BA
7A0D
3E08
4F93
21DA
0330
5725
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
7363
25594
10678
18026
14483
11449
21128
15005
21838
25797
14870
23232
32747
840
25426
12856
29766
25939
28040
5748
639
27761
26921
10236
2908
15135
11094
3091
28406
7023
20176
30481
26763
6676
32048
27701
17686
12727
9305
3184
24247
3865
11738
20588
30874
10260
31618
20223
31635
15560
5439
15530
29297
5748
25036
4793
10492
30054
3649
9467
25356
32310
25534
3882
7259
10817
5773
13227
7969
4525
18483
379
8264
27127
5104
8849
24150
14317
19955
10172
13348
18609
22879
15971
23864
4819
30181
6615
25960
19007
24355
7926
20802
3037
29498
7940
27125
4333
408
26030
1CC3
63FA
29B6
466A
3893
2CB9
5288
3A9D
554E
64C5
3A16
5AC0
7FEB
0348
6352
3238
7446
6553
6D88
1674
027F
6C71
6929
27FC
0B5C
3B1F
2B56
0C13
6EF6
1B6F
4ED0
7711
688B
1A14
7D30
6C35
4516
31B7
2459
0C70
5EB7
0F19
2DDA
506C
789A
2814
7B82
4EFF
7B93
3CC8
153F
3CAA
7271
1674
61CC
12B9
28FC
7566
0E41
24FB
630C
7E36
63BE
0F2A
1C5B
2A41
168D
33AB
1F21
11AD
4833
017B
2048
69F7
13F0
2291
5E56
37ED
4DF3
27BC
3424
48B1
595F
3E63
5D38
12D3
75E5
19D7
6568
4A3F
5F23
1EF6
5142
0BDD
733A
1F04
69F5
10ED
0198
65AE
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
15408
6414
8164
10347
29369
10389
24783
18400
22135
4625
22346
2545
7786
20209
26414
1478
15122
24603
677
13705
13273
14879
6643
23138
28838
9045
10792
25666
11546
15535
16134
8360
14401
26045
24070
30300
13602
32679
16267
9063
19487
12778
27309
12527
953
15958
6068
23577
32156
32709
32087
97
7618
93
16052
14300
11129
6602
14460
25458
15869
27047
26808
7354
27834
11250
552
27058
14808
9642
32253
26081
21184
11748
32676
2425
19455
19889
18177
2492
15086
30632
27549
6911
9937
2467
25831
32236
12987
11714
19283
11542
27928
26637
10035
10748
24429
29701
14997
32235
3C30
190E
1FE4
286B
72B9
2895
60CF
47E0
5677
1211
574A
09F1
1E6A
4EF1
672E
05C6
3B12
601B
02A5
3589
33D9
3A1F
19F3
5A62
70A6
2355
2A28
6442
2D1A
3CAF
3F06
20A8
3841
65BD
5E06
765C
3522
7FA7
3F8B
2367
4C1F
31EA
6AAD
30EF
03B9
3E56
17B4
5C19
7D9C
7FC5
7D57
0061
1DC2
005D
3EB4
37DC
2B79
19CA
387C
6372
3DFD
69A7
68B8
1CBA
6CBA
2BF2
0228
69B2
39D8
25AA
7DFD
65E1
52C0
2DE4
7FA4
0979
4BFF
4DB1
4701
09BC
3AEE
77A8
6B9D
1AFF
26D1
09A3
64E7
7DEC
32BB
2DC2
4B53
2D16
6D18
680D
2733
29FC
5F6D
7405
3A95
7DEB
. . . continued on next page
E-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
3698
16322
17429
21730
17808
30068
12737
28241
20371
13829
13366
25732
19864
5187
23219
28242
6243
445
21346
13256
18472
25945
31051
1093
5829
31546
29833
18146
24813
47
3202
21571
7469
25297
8175
28519
4991
7907
17728
14415
30976
26376
19063
19160
3800
8307
12918
19642
24873
22071
29563
13078
10460
17590
20277
19988
6781
32501
6024
20520
31951
26063
27203
6614
10970
5511
17119
16064
31614
4660
13881
16819
6371
24673
6055
10009
5957
11597
22155
15050
16450
27899
2016
17153
15849
30581
3600
4097
671
20774
24471
27341
19388
25278
9505
26143
13359
2154
13747
27646
0E72
3FC2
4415
54E2
4590
7574
31C1
6E51
4F93
3605
3436
6484
4D98
1443
5AB3
6E52
1863
01BD
5362
33C8
4828
6559
794B
0445
16C5
7B3A
7489
46E2
60ED
002F
0C82
5443
1D2D
62D1
1FEF
6F67
137F
1EE3
4540
384F
7900
6708
4A77
4AD8
0ED8
2073
3276
4CBA
6129
5637
737B
3316
28DC
44B6
4F35
4E14
1A7D
7EF5
1788
5028
7CCF
65CF
6A43
19D6
2ADA
1587
42DF
3EC0
7B7E
1234
3639
41B3
18E3
6061
17A7
2719
1745
2D4D
568B
3ACA
4042
6CFB
07E0
4301
3DE9
7775
0E10
1001
029F
5126
5F97
6ACD
4BBC
62BE
2521
661F
342F
086A
35B3
6BFE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
1849
8161
29658
10865
8904
15034
18736
26360
30233
19154
6683
12866
9932
23537
31881
14121
24033
20750
10673
6628
9236
25468
28021
21490
23218
15773
27540
9073
24998
20935
1601
31729
24390
24760
24103
26211
22639
24225
8864
19959
15488
13188
29931
9580
1900
16873
6459
9821
24900
31435
30593
6539
5230
8795
27046
9994
17154
28998
3012
10260
28763
31963
31517
3307
5485
17663
28499
8032
15807
2330
21792
28389
16973
32268
17903
23984
17822
22682
25977
7525
8225
30785
1008
28604
20680
30086
1800
17980
20339
10387
25079
31578
9694
12639
23724
32051
21547
1077
21733
13823
0739
1FE1
73DA
2A71
22C8
3ABA
4930
66F8
7619
4AD2
1A1B
3242
26CC
5BF1
7C89
3729
5DE1
510E
29B1
19E4
2414
637C
6D75
53F2
5AB2
3D9D
6B94
2371
61A6
51C7
0641
7BF1
5F46
60B8
5E27
6663
586F
5EA1
22A0
4DF7
3C80
3384
74EB
256C
076C
41E9
193B
265D
6144
7ACB
7781
198B
146E
225B
69A6
270A
4302
7146
0BC4
2814
705B
7CDB
7B1D
0CEB
156D
44FF
6F53
1F60
3DBF
091A
5520
6EE5
424D
7E0C
45EF
5DB0
459E
589A
6579
1D65
2021
7841
03F0
6FBC
50C8
7586
0708
463C
4F73
2893
61F7
7B5A
25DE
315F
5CAC
7D33
542B
0435
54E5
35FF
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23557
17638
3545
9299
6323
19590
7075
14993
19916
6532
17317
16562
26923
9155
20243
32391
20190
27564
20869
9791
714
7498
23278
8358
9468
23731
25133
2470
17501
24671
11930
9154
7388
3440
27666
22888
13194
26710
7266
15175
15891
26692
14757
28757
31342
19435
2437
20573
18781
18948
30766
5985
6823
20973
10197
9618
22705
5234
12541
8019
22568
5221
25216
1354
29335
6682
26128
29390
8852
6110
11847
10239
6955
10897
14076
12450
8954
19709
1252
15142
26958
8759
12696
11936
25635
17231
22298
7330
30758
6933
2810
8820
7831
19584
2944
19854
10456
17036
2343
14820
5C05
44E6
0DD9
2453
18B3
4C86
1BA3
3A91
4DCC
1984
43A5
40B2
692B
23C3
4F13
7E87
4EDE
6BAC
5185
263F
02CA
1D4A
5AEE
20A6
24FC
5CB3
622D
09A6
445D
605F
2E9A
23C2
1CDC
0D70
6C12
5968
338A
6856
1C62
3B47
3E13
6844
39A5
7055
7A6E
4BEB
0985
505D
495D
4A04
782E
1761
1AA7
51ED
27D5
2592
58B1
1472
30FD
1F53
5828
1465
6280
054A
7297
1A1A
6610
72CE
2294
17DE
2E47
27FF
1B2B
2A91
36FC
30A2
22FA
4CFD
04E4
3B26
694E
2237
3198
2EA0
6423
434F
571A
1CA2
7826
1B15
0AFA
2274
1E97
4C80
0B80
4D8E
28D8
428C
0927
39E4
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
E-7
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13904
27198
3685
16820
22479
6850
15434
19332
8518
14698
21476
30475
23984
1912
26735
15705
3881
20434
16779
31413
16860
8322
28530
26934
18806
20216
9245
8271
18684
8220
6837
9613
31632
27448
12417
30901
9366
12225
21458
6466
8999
26718
3230
27961
28465
6791
17338
11832
11407
15553
1056
1413
3311
4951
749
6307
961
2358
28350
31198
11467
8862
6327
7443
28574
25093
6139
22047
32545
7112
28535
10378
15065
5125
12528
23215
20959
3568
26453
29421
24555
10779
25260
16084
26028
29852
14978
12182
25143
15838
5336
21885
20561
30097
21877
23589
26060
9964
25959
3294
3650
6A3E
0E65
41B4
57CF
1AC2
3C4A
4B84
2146
396A
53E4
770B
5DB0
0778
686F
3D59
0F29
4FD2
418B
7AB5
41DC
2082
6F72
6936
4976
4EF8
241D
204F
48FC
201C
1AB5
258D
7B90
6B38
3081
78B5
2496
2FC1
53D2
1942
2327
685E
0C9E
6D39
6F31
1A87
43BA
2E38
2C8F
3CC1
0420
0585
0CEF
1357
02ED
18A3
03C1
0936
6EBE
79DE
2CCB
229E
18B7
1D13
6F9E
6205
17FB
561F
7F21
1BC8
6F77
288A
3AD9
1405
30F0
5AAF
51DF
0DF0
6755
72ED
5FEB
2A1B
62AC
3ED4
65AC
749C
3A82
2F96
6237
3DDE
14D8
557D
5051
7591
5575
5C25
65CC
26EC
6567
0CDE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6952
13599
22242
8410
31287
3425
7717
9666
4259
7349
10738
27221
11992
956
26087
20348
22084
10217
28949
27786
8430
4161
14265
13467
9403
10108
17374
16887
9342
4110
23690
17174
15816
13724
18832
28042
4683
17968
10729
3233
16451
13359
1615
26444
26184
23699
8669
5916
18327
20400
528
19710
18507
18327
20298
17005
20444
1179
14175
15599
22617
4431
16999
16565
14287
32574
17857
25907
29100
3556
31111
5189
21328
17470
6264
25451
26323
1784
32150
30538
25033
23345
12630
8042
13014
14926
7489
6091
32551
7919
2668
25730
26132
29940
25734
24622
13030
4982
31887
1647
1B28
351F
56E2
20DA
7A37
0D61
1E25
25C2
10A3
1CB5
29F2
6A55
2ED8
03BC
65E7
4F7C
5644
27E9
7115
6C8A
20EE
1041
37B9
349B
24BB
277C
43DE
41F7
247E
100E
5C8A
4316
3DC8
359C
4990
6D8A
124B
4630
29E9
0CA1
4043
342F
064F
674C
6648
5C93
21DD
171C
4797
4FB0
0210
4CFE
484B
4797
4F4A
426D
4FDC
049B
375F
3CEF
5859
114F
4267
40B5
37CF
7F3E
45C1
6533
71AC
0DE4
7987
1445
5350
443E
1878
636B
66D3
06F8
7D96
774A
61C9
5B31
3156
1F6A
32D6
3A4E
1D41
17CB
7F27
1EEF
0A6C
6482
6614
74F4
6486
602E
32E6
1376
7C8F
066F
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23393
5619
17052
21292
2868
19538
24294
22895
27652
29905
21415
1210
22396
26552
24829
8663
991
21926
23306
13646
148
24836
24202
9820
12939
2364
14820
2011
13549
28339
25759
11116
31448
27936
3578
12371
12721
10264
25344
13246
544
9914
4601
16234
24475
26318
6224
13381
30013
22195
1756
19068
28716
31958
16097
1308
3320
16682
6388
12828
3518
3494
6458
10717
8463
27337
19846
9388
21201
31422
166
28622
6477
10704
25843
25406
21523
8569
9590
22466
12455
27506
21847
28392
1969
30715
23674
22629
12857
30182
21880
6617
27707
16249
24754
31609
22689
3226
4167
25624
5B61
15F3
429C
532C
0B34
4C52
5EE6
596F
6C04
74D1
53A7
04BA
577C
67B8
60FD
21D7
03DF
55A6
5B0A
354E
0094
6104
5E8A
265C
328B
093C
39E4
07DB
34ED
6EB3
649F
2B6C
7AD8
6D20
0DFA
3053
31B1
2818
6300
33BE
0220
26BA
11F9
3F6A
5F9B
66CE
1850
3445
753D
56B3
06DC
4A7C
702C
7CD6
3EE1
051C
0CF8
412A
18F4
321C
0DBE
0DA6
193A
29DD
210F
6AC9
4D86
24AC
52D1
7ABE
00A6
6FCE
194D
29D0
64F3
633E
5413
2179
2576
57C2
30A7
6B72
5557
6EE8
07B1
77FB
5C7A
5865
3239
75E6
5578
19D9
6C3B
3F79
60B2
7B79
58A1
0C9A
1047
6418
. . . continued on next page
E-8
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17418
14952
52
27254
15064
10942
377
14303
24427
26629
20011
16086
24374
9969
29364
25560
28281
7327
32449
26334
14760
15128
29912
4244
8499
9362
10175
30957
12755
19350
1153
29304
6041
21668
28048
10096
23388
15542
24013
2684
19018
25501
4489
31011
29448
25461
11846
30331
10588
32154
30173
15515
5371
10242
28052
14714
19550
8866
15297
10898
31315
19475
1278
11431
31392
4381
14898
23959
16091
9037
24162
6383
27183
16872
9072
12966
28886
25118
20424
6729
20983
12372
13948
27547
8152
17354
17835
14378
7453
26317
5955
10346
13200
30402
7311
3082
21398
31104
24272
27123
440A
3A68
0034
6A76
3AD8
2ABE
0179
37DF
5F6B
6805
4E2B
3ED6
5F36
26F1
72B4
63D8
6E79
1C9F
7EC1
66DE
39A8
3B18
74D8
1094
2133
2492
27BF
78ED
31D3
4B96
0481
7278
1799
54A4
6D90
2770
5B5C
3CB6
5DCD
0A7C
4A4A
639D
1189
7923
7308
6375
2E46
767B
295C
7D9A
75DD
3C9B
14FB
2802
6D94
397A
4C5E
22A2
3BC1
2A92
7A53
4C13
04FE
2CA7
7AA0
111D
3A32
5D97
3EDB
234D
5E62
18EF
6A2F
41E8
2370
32A6
70D6
621E
4FC8
1A49
51F7
3054
367C
6B9B
1FD8
43CA
45AB
382A
1D1D
66CD
1743
286A
3390
76C2
1C8F
0C0A
5396
7980
5ED0
69F3
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
8709
7476
26
13627
7532
5471
20844
19007
32357
26066
30405
8043
12187
17064
14682
12780
26348
24479
28336
13167
7380
7564
14956
2122
16713
4681
16911
28070
18745
9675
21392
14652
23068
10834
14024
5048
11694
7771
32566
1342
9509
24606
22804
27969
14724
24682
5923
27373
5294
16077
29906
20593
17473
5121
14026
7357
9775
4433
21468
5449
29461
26677
639
22639
15696
18098
7449
24823
20817
24474
12081
16971
31531
8436
4536
6483
14443
12559
10212
17176
26311
6186
6974
31729
4076
8677
27881
7189
16562
32090
17821
5173
6600
15201
16507
1541
10699
15552
12136
31429
2205
1D34
001A
353B
1D6C
155F
516C
4A3F
7E65
65D2
76C5
1F6B
2F9B
42A8
395A
31EC
66EC
5F9F
6EB0
336F
1CD4
1D8C
3A6C
084A
4149
1249
420F
6DA6
4939
25CB
5390
393C
5A1C
2A52
36C8
13B8
2DAE
1E5B
7F36
053E
2525
601E
5914
6D41
3984
606A
1723
6AED
14AE
3ECD
74D2
5071
4441
1401
36CA
1CBD
262F
1151
53DC
1549
7315
6835
027F
586F
3D50
46B2
1D19
60F7
5151
5F9A
2F31
424B
7B2B
20F4
11B8
1953
386B
310F
27E4
4318
66C7
182A
1B3E
7BF1
0FEC
21E5
6CE9
1C15
40B2
7D5A
459D
1435
19C8
3B61
407B
0605
29CB
3CC0
2F68
7AC5
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
30380
15337
10716
13592
2412
15453
13810
12956
30538
10814
18939
19767
20547
29720
31831
26287
11310
25724
21423
5190
258
13978
4670
23496
23986
839
11296
30913
27297
10349
32504
18405
3526
19161
23831
21380
4282
32382
806
6238
10488
19507
27288
2390
19094
13860
9225
2505
27806
2408
10924
23096
22683
10955
17117
15837
22647
10700
30293
5579
11057
30238
14000
22860
27172
307
20380
26427
10702
30024
14018
4297
13938
25288
27294
31835
8228
12745
6746
1456
27743
27443
31045
12225
21482
14678
30656
13721
21831
30208
9995
3248
12030
5688
2082
23143
25906
15902
21084
25723
76AC
3BE9
29DC
3518
096C
3C5D
35F2
329C
774A
2A3E
49FB
4D37
5043
7418
7C57
66AF
2C2E
647C
53AF
1446
0102
369A
123E
5BC8
5DB2
0347
2C20
78C1
6AA1
286D
7EF8
47E5
0DC6
4AD9
5D17
5384
10BA
7E7E
0326
185E
28F8
4C33
6A98
0956
4A96
3624
2409
09C9
6C9E
0968
2AAC
5A38
589B
2ACB
42DD
3DDD
5877
29CC
7655
15CB
2B31
761E
36B0
594C
6A24
0133
4F9C
673B
29CE
7548
36C2
10C9
3672
62C8
6A9E
7C5B
2024
31C9
1A5A
05B0
6C5F
6B33
7945
2FC1
53EA
3956
77C0
3599
5547
7600
270B
0CB0
2EFE
1638
0822
5A67
6532
3E1E
525C
647B
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
E-9
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29572
13173
10735
224
12083
22822
2934
27692
10205
7011
22098
2640
4408
102
27632
19646
26967
32008
7873
655
25274
16210
11631
8535
19293
12110
21538
10579
13032
14717
11666
25809
5008
32418
22175
11742
22546
21413
133
4915
8736
1397
18024
15532
26870
5904
24341
13041
23478
1862
5578
25731
10662
11084
31098
16408
6362
2719
14732
22744
1476
8445
21118
22198
22030
10363
25802
2496
31288
24248
14327
23154
13394
1806
17179
10856
25755
15674
7083
29096
3038
16277
25525
20465
28855
32732
20373
9469
26155
6957
12214
21479
31914
32311
11276
20626
423
2679
15537
10818
7384
3375
29EF
00E0
2F33
5926
0B76
6C2C
27DD
1B63
5652
0A50
1138
0066
6BF0
4CBE
6957
7D08
1EC1
028F
62BA
3F52
2D6F
2157
4B5D
2F4E
5422
2953
32E8
397D
2D92
64D1
1390
7EA2
569F
2DDE
5812
53A5
0085
1333
2220
0575
4668
3CAC
68F6
1710
5F15
32F1
5BB6
0746
15CA
6483
29A6
2B4C
797A
4018
18DA
0A9F
398C
58D8
05C4
20FD
527E
56B6
560E
287B
64CA
09C0
7A38
5EB8
37F7
5A72
3452
070E
431B
2A68
649B
3D3A
1BAB
71A8
0BDE
3F95
63B5
4FF1
70B7
7FDC
4F95
24FD
662B
1B2D
2FB6
53E7
7CAA
7E37
2C0C
5092
01A7
0A77
3CB1
2A42
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14786
18538
17703
112
17993
11411
1467
13846
16958
23649
11049
1320
2204
51
13816
9823
25979
16004
24240
20631
12637
8105
18279
16763
29822
6055
10769
17785
6516
19822
5833
25528
2504
16209
31391
5871
11273
30722
20882
22601
4368
21354
9012
7766
13435
2952
32346
18600
11739
931
2789
31869
5331
5542
15549
8204
3181
19315
7366
11372
738
24130
10559
11099
11015
23041
12901
1248
15644
12124
21959
11577
6697
903
28593
5428
31857
7837
17385
14548
1519
20982
32742
27076
30311
16366
27126
23618
32041
17322
6107
26575
15957
28967
5638
10313
20207
19207
20580
5409
39C2
486A
4527
0070
4649
2C93
05BB
3616
423E
5C61
2B29
0528
089C
0033
35F8
265F
657B
3E84
5EB0
5097
315D
1FA9
4767
417B
747E
17A7
2A11
4579
1974
4D6E
16C9
63B8
09C8
3F51
7A9F
16EF
2C09
7802
5192
5849
1110
536A
2334
1E56
347B
0B88
7E5A
48A8
2DDB
03A3
0AE5
7C7D
14D3
15A6
3CBD
200C
0C6D
4B73
1CC6
2C6C
02E2
5E42
293F
2B5B
2B07
5A01
3265
04E0
3D1C
2F5C
55C7
2D39
1A29
0387
6FB1
1534
7C71
1E9D
43E9
38D4
05EF
51F6
7FE6
69C4
7667
3FEE
69F6
5C42
7D29
43AA
17DB
67CF
3E55
7127
1606
2849
4EEF
4B07
5064
1521
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13347
7885
6669
8187
18145
14109
14231
27606
783
6301
5067
15383
1392
7641
25700
25259
19813
20933
638
16318
6878
1328
14744
22800
25919
4795
18683
32658
1586
27208
17517
599
16253
8685
29972
22128
19871
19405
17972
8599
10142
26834
23710
27280
6570
7400
26374
22218
29654
13043
13427
31084
24023
23931
15836
6085
30324
27561
13821
269
28663
29619
2043
6962
29119
22947
9612
18698
16782
29735
2136
8086
10553
11900
19996
5641
28328
25617
26986
5597
14078
13247
499
30469
17544
28510
23196
13384
4239
20725
6466
28465
19981
16723
4522
678
15320
29116
5388
22845
3423
1ECD
1A0D
1FFB
46E1
371D
3797
6BD6
030F
189D
13CB
3C17
0570
1DD9
6464
62AB
4D65
51C5
027E
3FBE
1ADE
0530
3998
5910
653F
12BB
48FB
7F92
0632
6A48
446D
0257
3F7D
21ED
7514
5670
4D9F
4BCD
4634
2197
279E
68D2
5C9E
6A90
19AA
1CE8
6706
56CA
73D6
32F3
3473
796C
5DD7
5D7B
3DDC
17C5
7674
6BA9
35FD
010D
6FF7
73B3
07FB
1B32
71BF
59A3
258C
490A
418E
7427
0858
1F96
2939
2E7C
4E1C
1609
6EA8
6411
696A
15DD
36FE
33BF
01F3
7705
4488
6F5E
5A9C
3448
108F
50F5
1942
6F31
4E0D
4153
11AA
02A6
3BD8
71BC
150C
593D
. . . continued on next page
E-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
5850
5552
12589
23008
27636
17600
17000
21913
30320
28240
7260
17906
5882
22080
12183
23082
17435
18527
31902
18783
20027
7982
20587
10004
13459
13383
28930
4860
13108
24161
20067
2667
13372
28743
24489
249
19960
29682
31101
27148
26706
5148
4216
5762
245
21882
3763
206
28798
32402
23074
20250
14629
29175
13943
11072
29492
5719
7347
12156
25623
27725
28870
31478
28530
24834
9075
32265
3175
17434
12178
25613
31692
25384
18908
25816
4661
31115
7691
1311
16471
15771
16112
21062
29690
10141
19014
22141
11852
26404
30663
32524
28644
10228
23536
18045
25441
27066
13740
13815
16DA
15B0
312D
59E0
6BF4
44C0
4268
5599
7670
6E50
1C5C
45F2
16FA
5640
2F97
5A2A
441B
485F
7C9E
495F
4E3B
1F2E
506B
2714
3493
3447
7102
12FC
3334
5E61
4E63
0A6B
343C
7047
5FA9
00F9
4DF8
73F2
797D
6A0C
6852
141C
1078
1682
00F5
557A
0EB3
00CE
707E
7E92
5A22
4F1A
3925
71F7
3677
2B40
7334
1657
1CB3
2F7C
6417
6C4D
70C6
7AF6
6F72
6102
2373
7E09
0C67
441A
2F92
640D
7BCC
6328
49DC
64D8
1235
798B
1E0B
051F
4057
3D9B
3EF0
5246
73FA
279D
4A46
567D
2E4C
6724
77C7
7F0C
6FE4
27F4
5BF0
467D
6361
69BA
35AC
35F7
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
2925
2776
18758
11504
13818
8800
8500
31516
15160
14120
3630
8953
2941
11040
17947
11541
29661
30207
15951
30079
30413
3991
31205
5002
19353
19443
14465
2430
6554
32480
30433
21733
6686
27123
32260
20908
9980
14841
28014
13574
13353
2574
2108
2881
20906
10941
22153
103
14399
16201
11537
10125
21166
30407
21767
5536
14746
17687
16485
6078
31799
30746
14435
15739
14265
12417
24453
28984
18447
8717
6089
31802
15846
12692
9454
12908
18214
29433
16697
19635
28183
20721
8056
10531
14845
24050
9507
25858
5926
13202
30175
16262
14322
5114
11768
27906
32652
13533
6870
21703
0B6D
0AD8
4946
2CF0
35FA
2260
2134
7B1C
3B38
3728
0E2E
22F9
0B7D
2B20
461B
2D15
73DD
75FF
3E4F
757F
76CD
0F97
79E5
138A
4B99
4BF3
3881
097E
199A
7EE0
76E1
54E5
1A1E
69F3
7E04
51AC
26FC
39F9
6D6E
3506
3429
0A0E
083C
0B41
51AA
2ABD
5689
0067
383F
3F49
2D11
278D
52AE
76C7
5507
15A0
399A
4517
4065
17BE
7C37
781A
3863
3D7B
37B9
3081
5F85
7138
480F
220D
17C9
7C3A
3DE6
3194
24EE
326C
4726
72F9
4139
4CB3
6E17
50F1
1F78
2923
39FD
5DF2
2523
6502
1726
3392
75DF
3F86
37F2
13FA
2DF8
6D02
7F8C
34DD
1AD6
54C7
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
24457
17161
21314
28728
22162
26259
22180
2266
10291
26620
19650
14236
11482
25289
12011
13892
17336
10759
26816
31065
8578
24023
16199
22310
30402
16613
13084
3437
1703
22659
26896
1735
16178
19166
665
20227
24447
16771
27209
6050
29088
7601
4905
5915
6169
21303
28096
8905
26997
15047
28430
8660
2659
8803
19690
22169
8511
17393
11336
13576
22820
13344
20107
8013
18835
16793
9818
4673
13609
10054
10988
14744
17930
25452
11334
15451
11362
2993
11012
5806
20180
8932
23878
20760
32764
32325
25993
3268
25180
12149
10193
9128
7843
25474
11356
11226
16268
14491
8366
26009
5F89
4309
5342
7038
5692
6693
56A4
08DA
2833
67FC
4CC2
379C
2CDA
62C9
2EEB
3644
43B8
2A07
68C0
7959
2182
5DD7
3F47
5726
76C2
40E5
331C
0D6D
06A7
5883
6910
06C7
3F32
4ADE
0299
4F03
5F7F
4183
6A49
17A2
71A0
1DB1
1329
171B
1819
5337
6DC0
22C9
6975
3AC7
6F0E
21D4
0A63
2263
4CEA
5699
213F
43F1
2C48
3508
5924
3420
4E8B
1F4D
4993
4199
265A
1241
3529
2746
2AEC
3998
460A
636C
2C46
3C5B
2C62
0BB1
2B04
16AE
4ED4
22E4
5D46
5118
7FFC
7E45
6589
0CC4
625C
2F75
27D1
23A8
1EA3
6382
2C5C
2BDA
3F8C
389B
20AE
6599
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
E-11
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13463
15417
23101
14957
23429
12990
12421
28875
4009
1872
15203
30109
24001
4862
14091
6702
3067
28643
21379
20276
25337
19683
10147
16791
17359
13248
22740
13095
10345
30342
27866
9559
8808
12744
11618
27162
17899
29745
31892
23964
23562
2964
18208
15028
21901
24566
18994
13608
27492
11706
3684
23715
15314
32469
9816
4444
5664
7358
27264
28128
30168
29971
3409
16910
20739
10191
12819
19295
10072
15191
27748
720
29799
27640
263
24734
16615
20378
25116
19669
14656
27151
28728
25092
22601
2471
25309
15358
17739
12643
32730
19122
16870
10787
18400
20295
1937
17963
7438
12938
3497
3C39
5A3D
3A6D
5B85
32BE
3085
70CB
0FA9
0750
3B63
759D
5DC1
12FE
370B
1A2E
0BFB
6FE3
5383
4F34
62F9
4CE3
27A3
4197
43CF
33C0
58D4
3327
2869
7686
6CDA
2557
2268
31C8
2D62
6A1A
45EB
7431
7C94
5D9C
5C0A
0B94
4720
3AB4
558D
5FF6
4A32
3528
6B64
2DBA
0E64
5CA3
3BD2
7ED5
2658
115C
1620
1CBE
6A80
6DE0
75D8
7513
0D51
420E
5103
27CF
3213
4B5F
2758
3B57
6C64
02D0
7467
6BF8
0107
609E
40E7
4F9A
621C
4CD5
3940
6A0F
7038
6204
5849
09A7
62DD
3BFE
454B
3163
7FDA
4AB2
41E6
2A23
47E0
4F47
0791
462B
1D0E
328A
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19355
20428
31950
19686
31762
6495
18834
27061
22020
936
19553
27422
32560
2431
19029
3351
21549
26145
30737
10138
24748
30625
16897
28955
28727
6624
11370
18499
17892
15171
13933
17275
4404
6372
5809
13581
29477
27592
15946
11982
11781
1482
9104
7514
31510
12283
9497
6804
13746
5853
1842
24685
7657
29014
4908
2222
2832
3679
13632
14064
15084
29877
18580
8455
26301
24027
22325
27539
5036
21399
13874
360
29711
13820
20159
12367
28239
10189
12558
26710
7328
31547
14364
12546
25112
19183
32594
7679
27801
22157
16365
9561
8435
23341
9200
27039
19956
27945
3719
6469
4B9B
4FCC
7CCE
4CE6
7C12
195F
4992
69B5
5604
03A8
4C61
6B1E
7F30
097F
4A55
0D17
542D
6621
7811
279A
60AC
77A1
4201
711B
7037
19E0
2C6A
4843
45E4
3B43
366D
437B
1134
18E4
16B1
350D
7325
6BC8
3E4A
2ECE
2E05
05CA
2390
1D5A
7B16
2FFB
2519
1A94
35B2
16DD
0732
606D
1DE9
7156
132C
08AE
0B10
0E5F
3540
36F0
3AEC
74B5
4894
2107
66BD
5DDB
5735
6B93
13AC
5397
3632
0168
740F
35FC
4EBF
304F
6E4F
27CD
310E
6856
1CA0
7B3B
381C
3102
6218
4AEF
7F52
1DFF
6C99
568D
3FED
2559
20F3
5B2D
23F0
699F
4DF4
6D29
0E87
1945
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17460
17629
10461
21618
11498
193
16140
13419
10864
28935
18765
27644
21564
5142
1211
1203
5199
16945
4883
25040
7119
17826
4931
25705
10726
17363
2746
10952
19313
29756
14297
21290
1909
8994
13295
21590
26468
13636
5207
29493
18992
12567
12075
26658
21077
15595
4921
14051
5956
21202
5164
17126
21566
21845
28149
9400
19459
7190
3101
491
25497
29807
26508
4442
4871
31141
9864
12589
5417
8549
14288
8503
20357
15381
18065
24678
23858
7610
18097
20918
7238
30549
16320
20853
26736
10327
24404
7931
5310
554
27311
6865
7762
15761
12697
24850
15259
24243
30508
13982
4434
44DD
28DD
5472
2CEA
00C1
3F0C
346B
2A70
7107
494D
6BFC
543C
1416
04BB
04B3
144F
4231
1313
61D0
1BCF
45A2
1343
6469
29E6
43D3
0ABA
2AC8
4B71
743C
37D9
532A
0775
2322
33EF
5456
6764
3544
1457
7335
4A30
3117
2F2B
6822
5255
3CEB
1339
36E3
1744
52D2
142C
42E6
543E
5555
6DF5
24B8
4C03
1C16
0C1D
01EB
6399
746F
678C
115A
1307
79A5
2688
312D
1529
2165
37D0
2137
4F85
3C15
4691
6066
5D32
1DBA
46B1
51B6
1C46
7755
3FC0
5175
6870
2857
5F54
1EFB
14BE
022A
6AAF
1AD1
1E52
3D91
3199
6112
3B9B
5EB3
772C
369E
. . . continued on next page
E-12
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14301
23380
11338
2995
23390
14473
6530
20452
12226
1058
12026
19272
29989
8526
18139
3247
28919
7292
20740
27994
2224
6827
37DD
5B54
2C4A
0BB3
5B5E
3889
1982
4FE4
2FC2
0422
2EFA
4B48
7525
214E
46DB
0CAF
70F7
1C7C
5104
6D5A
08B0
1AAB
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19006
11690
5669
21513
11695
19860
3265
10226
6113
529
6013
9636
29870
4263
27985
18539
30279
3646
10370
13997
1112
17257
4A3E
2DAA
1625
5409
2DAF
4D94
0CC1
27F2
17E1
0211
177D
25A4
74AE
10A7
6D51
486B
7647
0E3E
2882
36AD
0458
4369
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
11239
30038
30222
13476
2497
31842
24342
25857
27662
24594
16790
25039
24086
21581
21346
28187
23231
18743
11594
7198
105
4534
2BE7
7556
760E
34A4
09C1
7C62
5F16
6501
6C0E
6012
4196
61CF
5E16
544D
5362
6E1B
5ABF
4937
2D4A
1C1E
0069
11B6
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
E-13
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Notes
E-14
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Appendix Content
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Test Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F-1
F-1
F-5
F-6
F-6
F-6
F-7
F-9
F-9
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Gigatronics 8542 power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-10
F-10
F-14
F-17
F-19
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Preparation
Purpose
This appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCS
interface, the HP8935 and the Advantest R3465. The Cybertest test set
doesn’t require any setup.
HP8921A Test Equipment
Connections
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A test
equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects
each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to
Table F-4). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and
any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses
have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to
the test equipment.
Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium
From Test Set:
8921A
CW RF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
IQ RF IN
DET OUT
CONTROL I/O
10 MHZ OUT
HPIB INTERFACE
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
CW RF IN
114.3 MHZ IF IN
IQ RF OUT
AUX DSP IN
CONTROL I/O
SYNTH REF IN
10 MHZ OUT
Apr 2001
Connector Type
83236A PCS
HPIB INTERFACE
REF IN
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
45–pin custom BUS
BNC–male – BNC–male
HPIB cable
BNC–male – BNC–male
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-1
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
REF IN
HP–IB
FW00368
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
F-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
Figure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium
From Test Set:
8921A
CW RF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
IQ RF IN
DET OUT
CONTROL I/O
10 MHZ OUT
HPIB INTERFACE
10 MHZ INPUT
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
CW RF IN
114.3 MHZ IF IN
IQ RF OUT
AUX DSP IN
CONTROL I/O
REF IN
HPIB INTERFACE
10 MHZ OUT
Connector Type
83236A PCS
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
SMC–female – SMC–female
45–pin custom BUS
BNC–male – BNC–male
HPIB cable
BNC–male – BNC–male
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-3
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium
10 MHZ WITH
RUBIDIUM STANDARD
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
REF IN
HP–IB
FW00369
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
F-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
HP8921A System Connectivity
Test
Follow the steps outlined in Table F-3 to verify that the connections
between the PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables are
intact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of each
instrument.
IMPORTANT
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system
controllers, from the system before running the
connectivity software.
Table F-3: System Connectivity
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select Card.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through the
connectivity setup.
Do the following when the test is complete,
 position cursor on STOP TEST and select it
 OR press the [K5] pushbutton.
To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-5
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Setting HP8921A and
HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address
Step
Action
If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.
Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.
 HP8921A HP–IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configure
on the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).
 HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:
– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1
Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Before the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Step
Action
Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.
Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
Pretest Setup for HP8935
Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935
Step
Action
Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.
Press the Push to Select knob.
Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
F-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
Advantest R3465 Connection
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest test
equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects
each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to
Table F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and
any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses
have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to
the test equipment.
Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
AC POWER
10 MHZ OUT
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
SERIAL I/O
R3465
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00370
GPIB
CONNECTOR
Apr 2001
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-7
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
FROM 10 MHZ
RUBIDIUM REFERENCE
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
AC POWER
10 MHZ OUT
SERIAL I/O
R3465/3463
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00371
GPIB
CONNECTOR
F-8
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock
setup
Table F-7 describes the steps to set the GPIB address and clock for the
Advantest R3465 equipment.
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup
Step
Action
Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:
 Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
 Push the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)
– Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.
– If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob to
enter)
Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set if
required)
Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
 Push the Date/Time CRT menu key
 If required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernier
knob to enter)
 Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
Pretest Setup for Advantest
R3465
Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346
Step
Action
Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.
Press the RESET button.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-9
Manual Cable Calibration
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using HP PCS Interface (HP83236)
Table F-9 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using
the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
NOTE
This calibration method must be executed with great care.
Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit of
the power meter sensor (–30 dBm).
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.
Press the Preset pushbutton.
Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.
If using HP 83236A:
Set channel number=:
– Position cursor at Channel
Number and select it.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric
keypad; press [Enter] and the
screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the
chan# will be displayed on the
channel number line.
F-10
If using HP 83236B:
Set channel frequency:
– Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.
– Select User Defined Frequency.
– Go Back to Previous Menu.
– Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and
enter actual RX frequency.
– Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and
enter actual TX frequency.
. . . continued on next page
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
Set RF Generator level:
– Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.
– Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:
– Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:
Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:
– Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
– Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
– Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 – 1910
MHz).
– Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.
12
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
13
Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
14
On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
15
Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.
16
Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude
by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
17
Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter
before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
18
Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each
component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record the
calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.
 Example:
(A) Test Cable(s)
(B) 20 dB Attenuator =
(B) Directional Coupler =
–1.4 dB
–20.1 dB
–29.8 dB
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-11
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
19
After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test
setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
 Example:
Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
21
Select Continue (K2).
22
Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.
23
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
24
Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields
not indicated remain at default):
 Verify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:
–
–
–
–
under To Screen, select More
select IO CONFIG
Set HP–IB Adrs to 18
set Mode to Talk&Lstn
 Verify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)
– Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.
– Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq
25
F-12
Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Figure F-5: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
(B)
20 dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
150 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
Apr 2001
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
FW00292
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-13
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using Advantest R3465
NOTE
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performed
at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display
Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key
Select the Setup CRT menu key
Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
Select the return CRT menu key
Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys
Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10
Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13
Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
15
Record the power meter reading ________________________
. . . continued on next page
F-14
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
16
Action
Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17
Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-6, “Setups
A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.
Example:
(A) 1st Test Cable
= –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable
= –1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator
= –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler
= –29.8 dB
18
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
19
Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example:
Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area
21
Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency
22
Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23
Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-15
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Figure F-6: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
(A) & (B)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
F-16
FW00320
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Calibrating HP 437 Power
Meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps outlined in Table F-11 to enter information unique to
the power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-7 as
required.
IMPORTANT
This procedure must be done in conjunction with the
automated calibration to enter power sensor specific
calibration values.
Figure F-7: Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
TO POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.
POWER REFERENCE IS
ENABLED USING THE SHIFT 
KEYS
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
CONNECT POWER
SENSOR WITH POWER
METER TURNED OFF
FW00308
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis–calibration.
– Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.
– Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.
NOTE
The calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed to
warm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:
– To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET] .
– Use the [ ] or [ ] button to select HP–IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].
– Use the [ ] or [ ] button to select HP–IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].
– To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-17
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:
– Press [SHIFT] then [ ] to select SENSOR.
– Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [ ] or [ ] button to
select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].
NOTE
Be sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOT
displayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then [] to turn it off.
Press [ZERO] . Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.
Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.
To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:
– Press [SHIFT] then [].
– Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.
Perform the following to set the REF CF %:
– Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO] ) for CAL.
– Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)
NOTE
If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.
Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:
– Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.
– On the sensor's decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at 2 GHz. Enter
the sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and
0.10 is normal.)
10
To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:
– Press [SHIFT] then [].
– Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output.
F-18
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Calibrating Gigatronics 8542
power meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps in Table F-12 to enter information unique to the power
sensor.
Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
NOTE
Allow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before
performing the calibration procedure.
 Make sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.
 Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
 Set the POWER pushbutton to ON.
Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:
Press MENU. Use the
Use the
Use the
arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.
arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.
arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C or 8542C (as appropriate).
Press  and use the
arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.
Press ENTER.
 Connect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.
 Press ZERO.
 Wait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during this
process.
 Disconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
F-19
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
Figure F-8: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO
CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
WITH POWER METER
TURNED OFF
FRONT View
AC POWER
GPIB CONNECTION
REAR View
FW00564
F-20
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Appendix G: In–Service Calibration
Appendix Content
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
G-1
G-1
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Delta Calibration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8935 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
G-2
G-2
G-4
G-7
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-10
Apr 2001
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
DRAFT
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
Apr 2001
Introduction
Purpose
This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple
carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows
you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and
recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.
Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a
maintenance window.
This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4–to–1 combiners.
The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one
time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be
calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain
in service and vice versa.
Equipment Warm up
IMPORTANT
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)
has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.
Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,
causing incorrect measurements and degradation to system
performance.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-1
Power Delta Calibration
Power Delta Calibration
Introduction
The In–service calibration procedure has several differences from a
normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum
analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are
broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power
during In–service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A
spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given
frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less
accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for
the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum
analyzer.
HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration
Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during
In–Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has
been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
NOTE
This procedure requires two HP8921As.
Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure G-1).
Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Generator
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
. . . continued on next page
G-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring
HP8921A RF–IN port (see Figure G-2).
Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.
Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Analyzer Direction to Fwd
Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.
10
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result
B ________________________.
11
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.
12
Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table G-4).
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-3
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437B
HP 8921A
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX
OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00801
Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to
HP8921A
Measurement HP8921A
Source HP8921A
DUPLEX
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00802
Advantest R3465 Power Delta
Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table G-2 to perform the Advantest 3465 Power
Delta Calibration procedure.
Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
On the Advantest R3465:
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.
Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.
. . . continued on next page
G-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.
On the HP 437 Power Meter:
10
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
11
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor,
refer to Figure G-3.
12
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.
13
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.
15
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum
Analyzer INPUT Port, refer to Figure G-4.
16
Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.
17
Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
18
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
19
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
20
Press the dB/div CRT menu key.
21
Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.
22
Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.
23
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
24
Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
25
Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.
26
Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
27
Press the TRACE CRT menu key.
28
Press the AVG A CRT menu key.
29
Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-5
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
30
Press the return CRT menu key.
31
Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.
32
Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.
33
Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.
34
Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.
35
Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.
36
Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.
37
Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.
38
Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
39
Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.
40
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table G-4).
Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437B
Advantest
R3561L
RF OUT
Power
Sensor
HP437B
Short RF Cable
SENSOR
FW00803
G-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465
RF OUT
R3561L
Short RF Cable
R3465
INPUT
FW00804
HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table G-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure G-5).
Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Gen
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF–IN/OUT port
(see Figure G-6).
Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-7
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Anl Dir to Fwd
Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.
10
Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.
11
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result
B ________________________.
12
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.
13
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table G-4).
Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP437B
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00805
G-8
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP8935
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00806
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-9
In–Service Calibration
In–Service Calibration
IMPORTANT
This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time.
The system has no safe–guards to stop you from doing
something that will take the BTS out of service. If
possible, perform this procedure during a maintenance
window.
Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise
the entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.
At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion
hardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.
The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to
performing this procedure.
Prerequisites
 Expansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the
CDF file has been generated.
 The expansion devices have been inserted into the C–CCP cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.
 The site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have
been loaded onto the LMF.
 The LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.
IMPORTANT
Do not download code or data to any cards other than those
you are working on. Downloading code or data to other
cards will take the site OUT OF SERVICE.
The code file version numbers must match the version
numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do
not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
The BTS–#.cdf, CBSC–#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS
must have come from the CBSC.
 Test equipment has been configured per Figure G-7 or Figure G-8.
 An RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is
already known, must be in line to perform the in–service calibration.
 Test equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.
 A short RF cable and two BNC–N adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.
. . . continued on next page
G-10
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
In–Service Calibration – continued
 The Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table G-1,
Table G-2, or Table G-3).
Figure G-7: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
DUPLEX OUT
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
RX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ANTENNA
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
ANTENNA
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
TX
TEST
CABLE
RF IN/OUT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER WITH
UNUSED PORT
TERMINATED
RX
TEST
CABLE
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
FREQ
MONITOR
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00758
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-11
In–Service Calibration – continued
Figure G-8: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
RX
TEST
CABLE
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
DUPLEX OUT
ANTENNA
TX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF IN/OUT
RX
TEST
CABLE
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
BTS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
FREQ
MONITOR
EXT
REF
IN
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00759
G-12
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
In–Service Calibration – continued
Follow the procedure in Table G-4 to perform the In–Service
Calibration.
Table G-4: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Set up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:
– Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.
– Click Options>LMF Options from the menu bar at the login screen.
– Check only the applicable spectrum analyzer check box on the Test Equipment tab.
Ensure that the GPIB address is 18.
– Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.
– Click the Apply button.
– Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.
– Check the In–Service Calibration check box.
– Click the Apply button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.
Login to the target BTS:
– Select the target BTS icon.
– Click the Login button at the login screen.
Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:
– Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.
– Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up
window.
– Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.
NOTE
– The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
. . . continued on next page
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-13
In–Service Calibration – continued
Table G-4: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
– Add the value computed in Table G-1, Table G-2, or Table G-3 to the TX Cable Loss.
NOTE
Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics
and do not represent actual readings:
– Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm
– Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm
Input the Coupler Loss for the TX tests:
– Click Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss from the menu bar at the main window.
– Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of BTS installation.
– Click the Save button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
– To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>TX Coupler Loss.
Input the Coupler Loss for the RX tests:
– Click Util>Edit>Cable Loss from the menu bar at the main window.
– Add the appropriate coupler loss to the cable loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the
information taken at the time of BTS installation and input this value in the Cable Loss field.
– Click the Save button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX2 OOS_MANUAL.
! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE
and can result in dropped calls.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the
numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
NOTE
Be sure to include the redundant BBX2 in steps 8, 9, and 10.
. . . continued on next page
G-14
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
In–Service Calibration – continued
Table G-4: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
Download code and data to the target devices:
– Click Util>Tools>Update NextLoad to set the code version that will be downloaded.
– Check the appropriate code version in the pop up window and click the Save button to close.
– Select the target BBX2(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Device>Download Code to start downloading code.
– Select the target BBX2(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Device>Download Data to start downloading data.
! CAUTION
Perform the All Cal/Audit procedure on OOS devices only.
Run the All Cal/Audit procedure:
– Select the target BBX2(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Tests>All Cal/Audit from the menu bar at the main window.
– Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.
– Leave the Verify BLO check box checked and click the OK button to start calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the
directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.
10
Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX2(s):
– Click the Save Result button on the result screen.
The window closes automatically.
11
Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:
– Click Select>Logout to close the BTS connection.
– Close the LMF window.
12
Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC.
13
Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
G-15
In–Service Calibration – continued
Notes
G-16
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Index
Numbers
ATP – Waveform Quality (rho), 4-7
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-7
ATP Report, 4-12
10BaseT/10Base2 converter, LMF to BTS
connection, 3-17
ATP Test Procedure, 4-4
2–way Splitter, 1-10
Basic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-1
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-10
Acceptance Test Procedures ATP , 1-1
Battery Discharge Test, 2-10
Acronyms, 1-11
Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-6
ACTIVE LED
GLI, 6-24
MCC, 6-26
BBX, gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-1
BBX2, 1-18
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,
3-6
ALARM LED, GLI, 6-24
Alarm Monitor window, 3-82
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-82
All inclusive, TX ATP test outline – CCP shelf 1,
primary, 4-12
All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,
RFDS, 6-20
BBX2 Connector, 6-14
BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-26
BTS
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-19
LMF connection, 3-9, 3-17
system software download, 3-3
when to optimize, B-1
BTS Cabinet, 1-26
BTS Site Setup for Acceptance Test Procedures, 3-69
Create CAL File, 3-70
AMR, 1-18
Ancillary frame, when to optimize, B-1
Applying AC Power, 2-5
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-14
ATP
generate failure report, 4-12
generate report, 4-12
test matrix/detailed optimization, B-2
C–CCP shelf, 1-18
ATP – Code Domain Power, 4-9
ATP – Frame Error Rate (FER), 4-11
Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,
F-2, F-4
Calibrate BLO, 3-59
Calibrating Cables, 3-53
ATP – Pilot Time Offset, 4-8
Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS Interface
HP83236B, F-10
ATP – Spectral Purity Transmit Mask, 4-5
Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-53
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Index-1
Index
– continued
Calibration
data file calibration, BLO, 3-61
In–Service, G-5
power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-19
Code Domain Power/Noise, 4-9
Communication test set, rear panel, F-2, F-4
Communications System Analyzer, 1-8
Communications system analyzer , 1-8
Calibration Audit failure, 6-7
calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-61
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-42
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-3
Connector Functionality
Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-13
Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-13
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2
Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-2
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4
Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-12
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5
Copy Files from LMF to Diskette, 5-1
Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2
Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,
5-1
Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-9
Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-2
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-9
CSM, 1-18
and LFR primary functions, 3-32
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-8
CSM frequency verification, 3-34
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-8
CCD, 1-18
CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-22
Customer I/O, 1-19
CyberTest Communication Analyzer, 1-8
CCP, shelf 1 – all inclusive TX ATP test outline,
primary, 4-12
CDF
site configuration, 3-2
site equipage verification, 3-3
site type and equipage data information, 2-1
CDMA
allocation diagram for the North American, cellular
telephone frequency spectrum, D-4
optimization/ATP test matrix, B-1
DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame), 2-7
DC Power Problems, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-17
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-21
Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2
Digital Control Problems, 6-15
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-15
Digital Multimeter, 1-9
cdpower test, 4-9
Directional Coupler, 1-9
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-1
types configuration, 3-2
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
Download
BTS system software, 3-3
MGLI, 3-27
Non–MGLI2 Devices, 3-28
Cell Site Field Engineer CFE, 1-1
Download BLO Procedure, 3-65
Channel Service Unit, 3-4
Download/Enable MCCs, 3-31
CIO, 1-18
Duplexer/Directional Coupler DDC, 1-17, 1-18, 1-19,
1-20, 1-28
CIO Connectors, 6-14
CLI, 1-2
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels, 4-10
E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4
Index-2
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Index
– continued
Enable CSMs & BDCs, 3-30
High–impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-9
Equipment Overview, 1-13
HP 83236A, F-5
Equipment warm-up, 3-44
HP8921A, F-5
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-19
transceiver, 1-7
HP8935 Analyzer, 1-8
HSO, 1-18
HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-32
Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-19
I and Q values, E-1
fer test, 4-11
In–Service Calibration, G-5
Files, calibration data file, BLO, 3-61
Initial HP8921A setup, F-10
Folder Structure Overview, 3-13, 3-15
Frame, equipage preliminary operations, 2-1
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-1
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-23
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10
Installation and Update Procedures, 3-10
Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, B-2
Intercabinet I/O, 1-20
Gain set point, C-1
Internal FRU, 1-27
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4
Internal FRUs, 1-17
Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-20
IS–97 specification, E-1
GLI Connector, 6-13
ISB Inter Shelf Bus connectors, 6-13
GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-14
GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-24
GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-25
LAN, BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-19
LED Status Combinations for all Modules except
GLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-21
GLI2, 1-18
GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators, 6-25
GPIB, F-1, F-5, F-7
GPIB Cables, 1-8
GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5
LFR, 1-18
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6
LMF, 3-10, F-1, F-7
to BTS connection, 3-4, 3-9, 3-17
view CDF information, 3-3
GPS Initialization/Verification
estimated position accuracy, 3-35
surveyed position accuracy, 3-35
LMF Removal, 5-3
GPS satellite system, 3-30
Local Area Network (LAN) Tester, 1-10
Graphical User Interface Overview , 3-21
Logging In to a BTS, 3-22
Load Center Wiring, 2-5
Logging Out, 3-24
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification, 3-40
Hardware Requirements, 1-5
LPA errors, 6-5
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-10
LPA Module LED, 6-27
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Index-3
Index
– continued
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-27
Online Help, 1-2
Optimization, 1-1
major components, 1-16
Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, 1-3
Manual, layout, 1-1
Optional Test Equipment, 1-10
MASTER LED, GLI, 6-24
Optional test equipment, frequency counter, 1-10
MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-26
Oscilloscope, 1-10
MCC/CE, 4-9
MGLI2, Download, 3-27
MMI common connections, 3-26
PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,
3-17
MMI Connection, 3-26
Pilot Time Offset. See PN
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-23
GLI, 6-25
Ping, 3-19
MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-26
PN
offset programming information, E-1
offset usage, E-1
MMI equipment setup, 3-26
PN offset per sector, E-1
Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit, 1-8
PN Offset Usage , E-1
Module status indicators, 6-21
Power Input, 6-13
Motorola, SC9600 Base Transceiver Subsystem, 1-1
Power Meter, 1-8
illustration, F-17
Pre–calibration, F-17
MPC, 1-18
Multi–FER test Failure, 6-10
Power meter
calibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-19
illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-20
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-13
New Installations, 1-3
Pre–calibration, Power Meter, F-17
No AMR control, 6-16
No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-16
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-17
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-18
No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-15
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-15
No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-16
Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-1
test data sheets, A-2
Prepare to Leave the Site
External test equipment removal, 5-1
LMF Removal, 5-3
Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-3
Verify T1/E1, 5-3
Non–MGLI2, Download, 3-28
Prepare to leave the site
re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-3
re–connect BTS T1 spans, 5-3
North American, cellular telephone system frequency
spectrum, CDMA allocation, D-4
Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the
CBSC, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4
Null modem cable detail, 1-7
Product Description, 1-2
No or missing span line traffic, 6-16
Index-4
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001
Index
– continued
Program, TSU NAM, 3-81
SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-7
Pseudorandom Noise. See PN
Selecting Test Equipment, 3-51
ptoff test, 4-8
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-77
Punch Block, 3-6
Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-78
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-26
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-57
PWR/ALM LED
BBX2, 6-26
CSM, 6-22
DC/DC Converter, 6-21
generic, 6-21
MCC, 6-26
Setting Control Port, 3-5
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-58
SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, C-1
Site, equipage verification, 3-3
Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-2
site equippage, CDF file, 3-2
Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment, 1-10
Re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-3
Span Line connector , 6-13
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-3
Span Problems no control link, Troubleshooting, 6-28
Receive Distribution Card RXDC, 1-28
SPANS LED, 6-24
Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-3
Spectrum Analyzer, 1-10
Required documents, 1-4, 1-27
STATUS LED, GLI, 6-24
Required Test Equipment
Ethernet LAN transceiver, 1-7
substitute equipment, 1-5
Supported Test Sets, 3-42
RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-25
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-23
System Connectivity Test, F-5
Resetting BTS modules, 5-1
RF Adapters, 1-9
T1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4
RF Attenuators, 1-9
Telco Interface Board TIB, 1-28
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-59
Test data sheets
Alarm verification, A-16
general optimization checklist, A-4
GPS receiver operation, A-5
initial power tests, A-3
LFR receiver operation, A-6
pre–power tests, A-3
preliminary operations, A-2
RX antenna VSWR, A-16
SCLPA convergence, A-7
site checklist, A-2
TX antenna VSWR, A-15
TX BLO, A-8, A-13
verification of test equipment used, A-1
RF Test Cable, 1-10
RFDS – Fault Isolation, 6-19
RFDS Calibration, 3-79
RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-22
rho test, 4-7
RS–232 to GPIB Interface, 1-7
RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16
RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-19
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) ATP, 4-11
Test equipment, verification data sheets, A-1
Test equipment connections , F-1
SC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, B-4
Test Equipment Policy, 1-4
Apr 2001
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Index-5
Index
– continued
Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-43
TX Output Acceptance Tests – Introduction
Code domain power, 4-4
Pilot time offset, 4-4
Spectral purity TX mask, 4-3
Waveform Quality (rho), 4-3
Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-63
TX Path Calibration, 3-60
Test Set Calibration, 3-50
TX Pilot Time Offset ATP, 4-8
Timing Reference Cables, 1-8
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask ATP, 4-5
Transmit TX path audit, 3-67
TX Waveform Quality (rho) ATP, 4-7
Transmit TX path calibration, 3-64
TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-2
Transmit/Receive Module TRX, 1-27
txmask test, 4-5
Troubleshooting
DC Power Problems, 6-17
Span Problems no control link, 6-28
TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-18
Test Equipment Setup, 3-42
Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay Level
Offset, 3-56, F-14
Updating CDMA LMF Files, 5-1
UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-17
Troubleshooting CSM Checklist, 6-11
TX
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-15, A-16
BLO test data sheets, A-8, A-13
Verify, test equipment used, test data sheets, A-1
Virtual BTS, 1-13
TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-59
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , D-2
TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-18
TX Audit Test, 3-68
TX Bay Level Offset and TX ATP test equipment
setup calibration, 3-55
Walsh channels, 4-9
When to optimize
Ancillary – table, B-1
BTS, B-1
inter–frame cabling, B-2
TX Code Domain Power ATP, 4-9
tx fine adjust, E-1
XCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-13
TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,
illustration, 4-6
Xircom Model PE3–10B2, LMF to BTS connection,
3-17
Index-6
SC
4812ET BTS Optimization/ATP — CDMA LMF
DRAFT
Apr 2001

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2001:04:02 14:04:18
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2001:04:11 14:59:13-05:00
Page Count                      : 320
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools